神学资料专用站点

Schaff-Herzog Religious Encyclopaedia

샤프-헤르초크 종교백과

百科全书 Schaff et al. 1882 general

支持语言状态

英 韩1%

英 6639/6639 原文 · 韩 75/6639 翻译 · 0 审核

6639 个条目

韩英对照查看
LIVING GOD, CHURCH OF THE LIVING GOD, CHURCH OF THE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LIVING GOD, CHURCH OF THE: An organ- isation founded in 1894 in Indianapolis, Ind., by John Vinson (q.v.) and his mother, Mary Jane Vin- son, and by others in other places. It is Congre- gational in polity; has as officers elders and dea- cons, serving the local churches; and believes in annual associations of all local churches by dele- gates. It lays stress upon the fact that its ministry is composed of men and women called by the Holy Spirit; makes the Bible its creed and book of dis- cipline; and its ordinances are baptism of con- verted believers by immersion, the Lord's Supper, washing of feet, and the kiss of salutation, and it regards as of special importance the visitation of the sick and needy. The church also deems of special importance the doctrine of sanctification. It holds that Adam and Eve were created holy in soul, spirit, and body, and were possessed of free will; that both were allured by Satan and being led by him they disobeyed God's command, after which Satan in spirit entered into, and depraved them wholly. The depravity to which they were thus subjected affected by heredity only the bodies of their descendants, but soul and spirit of all in- fants, being the creation and gift of Godi at concep- tion (Eccl. xii. 7; Zech. xii. 1; Heb. xii. 9), are pure until by voluntary 3rielding to Satan's temptations they become defiled by their o^m first act of sin, after the fashion of Adam and Eve. To meet this doctrine of sin and depravity they regard the true doctrine of sanctification to be the following. The act itself is a '' setting apart," a " separation," in which there are six steps: (1) Universal Salvation through the blood of Jesus Christ of all infants from conception until the time when they volimtarily sin (Rom. v. 18; Matt. xix. 14). (2) Regenera- tion— conversiop, by faith and repentance through the blood of Jesus, whereby the indwelling Satan, installed by the commission of the first act of sin, is turned out, when Jesus Christ, the Holy Spirit and love enter the believer by faith in the risen Lord (Luke xi. 24-26; Eph. ii. 2, iv. 22-23; Col. iii. 9-10; John i. 13; Rom. v. 5). (3) Instanta- neous cleansing of soul, spirit and body, of all de- pravity, thus resulting in perfect hoUness (II Cor. vii. 1; Heb. vi. 1), by the blood of Jesus Christ and the believer's faith and consecration (Rom. xii. 1; Heb. xii. 14, etc.). (4) Baptism by the Holy Spirit resulting in the full manifestation of the fulness of the Holy Spirit and of the fire of love (Matt. iii. 11; Acts i. 5, 8, ii. 1-21). (5) Resurrection, affecting the body on the final judgment day, the body being changed, cleansed from its vileness into the like- ness of Christ's glorious body (Dan. xii. 2; Rom. viii. 23; I Cor. xv. 52-55; Phil. iii. 21). (6) The healing of the physical body from all diseases by and through the blood of Jesus and by the prayer of faith, diseases being caused directly or indirectly by Satan and his demons (Isa. liii. 4-5, H. V. mar- gin; Matt. viii. 17; James v. 14-15; Mark ix. 21- 29; Luke xiii. 11-17). Statistics are not at hand, but the church reports two congregations in Indianapolis, Ind., and many scattered adherents elsewhere. John Vinson.
LIVIBGSTOH, JOHH HEHRY LIVINGSTON, JOHN HENRY

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LIVINGSTON, JOHN HENRY: The "father of the Reformed Dutch Church in America "; b. at Poughkeepsie, N. Y., May 30, 1746; d. in New Brunswick, N. J., Jan. 20, 1825. He attended Yale College (M.A., 1762) and began the study of law, but went to Holland in 1766 to study theology at the University of Utrecht (D.D., 1770). He was licensed by the Classis of Amsterdam in 1769, and in 1770 he became second English preacher in the Reformed Dutch Church in New York. Driven from the city by the Revolution, he preached at Kingston 1776, at Albany 1776-78, at Livingstone Manor 1779-81, and at Poughkeepsie 1781-83. In 1784 he was appointed by the general synod pro- fessor of didactic and polemic theology; and in 1810 the synod called him to New Brunswick to open -a theological seminary there, and at the same time he was elected president of Queen's (now Rutger'a) Col- lege. These two offices he held until his death. By his learning, piety, and dignity, he won the respect of both parties then existing in the church; and un- der his skilful management " the Conferentte " and "theCoetus" were united (1771). Thus the credit of forming the independent organization of the Re- formed (Dutch) Church in America (q.v.) must be given to him. It was he, also, who principally shaped the constitution of this church, and pre- pared its first psalm- and hymn-book (1787). As a preacher he was much admired. His theological lectures are preserved in manuscript in the Sage Library, New Brunswick, but an abstract of them was published by the Rev. Alva Neal, New York, 1831, 2d ed. 1832. His publications include sev- eral sermons, also Funeral Service, or Meditations adapted to Funeral Addresses (New York, 1812); and A Dissertation on the Marriage of a Man with his Sister-in-Law (strongly condemning it as un- lawful; New Brunswick, 1816). BIBLIOGRAPHY: A. Gunn, Memoirs of John Henry Living- ston, New York, 1829, condensed by T. W. Chambers. 1858.
LIVIHGSTOHE, DAVID LIVINGSTONE, DAVID

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LIVINGSTONE, DAVID: Explorer and mis- sionary in Africa, was born at Blantyre (8 m. s.e. of Glasgow) Mar. 19, 1813, and died in Ilala, Central Africa, May 1, 1873. He grew up amid the austere Scotch piety of his home, with very limited schooling. At ten he went to work in a cotton factory, and formed the habit of putting most of his earnings into the acquisi- Early tion of books (a Latin grammar, works Life and on natural science, etc.), which he Education, studied far into the night. His studies were so successful that in 1830 he was able to enter the University of Glasgow, with the object of studying medicine, supporting himself by factory work in the summer months. To this pe- riod belongs his awakening to personal Christian- ity. He describes his inner transformation as be- ing similar to the curing of color-blindness. His desire to serve the kingdom of God was directed by an appeal of Gützlaff's toward the mission in China. He began to study theology with the de- sign of going to China as an independent mission- ary. Some friends, however, induced him to join an organized mission. In 1838 he entered the service of the London Missionary Society, at whose expense he continued bis studies. When theae were completed, his proposed expedition to China was prevented by the outbreak of the Opium War. Through the influence of Robert Moffat, then in Eng- land, his thoughts were turned to South Africa, for which he was duly commissioned on Dec. 8, 1840. At Moffat's station. Kuruman. Livingstone waa to learn the language of the Beclumna people. While astonished at the results already achieved there, he was obliged to modify his earlier concep- tions. In many particulars be waa Early Mis- not io harmony with the existing GJonary methods. Before long his charact«r- LAbors. istio impulse to go further manifcal«d itself. A few months after his arrival he made a journey of over 700 miles, winning the confidence of the natives wherever he went by his medical activity. Upon Moffat's return with the young missionary Edwards, Livingstone migrated with the latter to the Ba-katia tribe. Here, with great practical efficiency, he organized the Mabotaa station, to which in 18-13 be brought Moffat's daughter as his wife. On account of didiculties arising apparently out of the wounded vanity of his colleague, who even brought charges against him before the missionary board of directors, Liv- ingstone proceeded in 1S46 to the country of the Bakwena, deserting the house and plantations at Mabotsa. He now founded a station on the river KolobeiS to which Setshcle. the chieftain, trans- ferred his capital. This chief, who had known Livingstone since his first journey, was deeply im- pressed by his teaching, and when he made up his mind to abandon polygamy he was baptized. Un- fortunately, but few of his subjects followed him. Concerning Livingstone's personal missionary la- bors at this period little is known, as iux diaries have been lost. Since he refused to take in any but true believers, the congregation remained very small. He himself seems to have been far from satisfied with his labors here, which would never have made him famous. His great nature impelled him onward. There waa no rest for him at Kolobefi. At the coat of laborious journeys, he was continually seeking new tribes. The immediate occasion waa furnished by the destruction of his station by the Boers, who, having retreated before the English power into the interior, kept a sharp walch to prevent the natives from obtaining firearms, while Livingstone, a thor- ough free-trader, paid no attention to their wishes. So when Setshele failed to comply with the de- mand of the Boers that he should suppress this traffic in his tribe, a retaliatory expedition was un- dertaken against his capital, in which the mission station waa destroyed. At the time Livingstone with his wife and child was on the journey in course of which he discovered Lake Ngami, and was paving the way by hb acquaintance with Sebituane, chief of the Makololo, toward wider enterprises. liivinffBton I'lTinffstone After escorting his family to Gape Town, he re- turned, and in 1853 b^gan some preliminary mis- sionary labor with the tribe at Linyanti on the River Tshobe, which was in time to spread abroad to the Barotse race, then subject to the Makololo, in the luxuriantly fertile Zambesi plain. A mission of this kind, however, required a direct and easy way of conmiunication with home. In order to seek such a way, Livingstone, supplied by Sekeletu (son and successor of Sebituane) with a great com- pany of bearers, undertook the journey to Loanda, where he arrived May 31, 1864. After a short rest he returned to the Makololo, whose capital, by his advice, was transferred to the north bank of the Zambesi. Next he proceeded down stream to the east, discovered Victoria Falls, and in the spring of 1856 reached the Portuguese colony of Tete, where he left his Makololo companions and returned by way of Kilimane to England. Livingstone the missionary had become a world- renowned explorer. While writing the accounts of his travels, and in the midst of diverting influences, very extensive new plans took shape in his mind. A mission on vast lines, combined with coloniza- tion and trade, was contemplated. He severed his connection with the London Missionary Society, after it had sanctioned the founding Ezploia- of a Makololo mission, which he prom- tions ised to support. He personaUy a»- Z85&-64. sumed the leadership of an expedition to the Zambesi with government sup- port, in the capacity of British consul. With this was combined an enterprise of the Universities Mission looking toward the establishment of a ** colonizing mission " in the 2^ambesi district. This second period of Livingstone's activity in Africa (1858-64) was fuU of difficulties, disap- pointments, and failures. In the ascent of the Zambesi, the expedition foimd little support among the Portuguese. What proved the most serious obstacle to Livingstone's plans was their toleration of the slave-trade. Meanwhile he explored the Shire, a left-bank tributary of the Zambesi; dis- covered Lake Shirwa and reached, by way of the south, Lake Nyasa, which had been recently dis- covered along its eastern shore by the German ex- plorer Roscher. He then journeyed overland to the Makololo, among whom in the mean time a mission had been foimded by the London Society amid the greatest difficulties, but fever had car- ried off its entire staff. Shortly afterward, in an uprising of the subject tribes, the Makololo were exterminated. Their tribal lands were assigned to the Barotse, among whom eventually the Paris mission assumed the labor toward which Living- stone had aspired in connection with that region. Bishop MacKenzie meanwhile had arrived with missionaries and colonists. The first station of the colonizing mission was founded near Lake Shirwa. But while Livingstone was occupied with the farther exploration of Lake Nyasa (1862), the new establishment once again succumbed to the ravages of fever, drought, famine, and the assaults of the savage slave-hunter Ajawa. After the bish- op's death, the few remaining members removed the colony to the Shire. They succeeded no better here in efiPecting a permanent settlement; and thus the realization of Livingstone's favorite plan was frustrated. Besides all this, he had been troubled by dissensions among the officers of the expedition. A fresh reinforcement arrived, including Mrs. Liv- ingstone, who desired to share her husband's journeys. A few weeks later, he had to commit his wife to the grave (1862). From the depth of mourning he roused himself to new labor. He sought to discover a better approach to Lake Nyasa and the interior by way of the Rovuma. Here again many difficulties and disappointments were encountered. It grew plainer and plainer that the objects of the expedition were not yet to be real- ized, and in 1864 it was recalled by the Government. Livingstone remained only a year in England. With the vigorous cooperation of persons of influ- ence, he formed new plans, which no longer had to do with definite missionary labors, but contem- plated the solution of that great problem of civil- ization, the opening up of central Final Africa, especial stress being laid on Period of the suppression of the slave-trade. African Directly after completing his second Work, book. The Zambesi and its TrUnUaries 1865-73. (London, 1864), he sailed for Bombay with the idea of organizing a new ex- pedition from that base. He recruited soldiers in India; and two native Africans, Chuma and Susi, trained in an Indian mission school, became his faithful servants. The bearers were recruited on Johanna Island. Provision was made for beasts of burden, including camels, buffaloes, mules, and asses. This imposing expedition was led by Liv- ingstone, the sole European member of it, by way of Zanzibar to the mouth of the Rovuma. His plan was to pass around the Portuguese colony and open a route for legitimate trade conmiunication and Christian influences all the way to the interior of the continent. As the expedition proceeded geographical exploration became more and more prominent in its work. Again, and very soon, unexpected difficulties occurred. In course of a few months the Indian soldiers had to be sent back as totally unserviceable. Livingstone understood the Africans very \^ell, but not the Indians. The animals perished down to the last one. Lake Nyasa was reached with great efforts. Attacked by the savage Mafitu, the carriers from Johanna fled back to their home, and spread the report that Livingstone had been murdered, but he and the remnants of the caravan eluded the pursuers. While all Europe was mourning over his death, he still pushed on amid the greatest obstacles, sick, without medicine or proper food; and, falling in with an Arab caravan, arrived at Kasembe, thence discovering Lake Moero, and reaching Ujiji on Lake Tanganyika. Provisions were to await him here, but the Arab agent, weary of the delay, squandered them and embezzled the money. Despite all this, Livingstone so promptly recovered his strength in the wholesome air that he soon (1869), with his few attendants, undertook a new expedition westward through the district of the cannibal Manyema. At Nyangwe he reached the Lualaba, and supposed he had discovered the upper reaches of the Nile. He LivlnffBtone LobwaBser sought vainly to obtain a boat of some kind, fell 3ick again, and wearily dragged himself, with three attendants, back to Ujiji. Here he was met by the intrepid explorer, Henry M. Stanley, who had been sent out in search of him. Under his fostering care Livingstone recovered, and they both undertook a journey of exploration to the north end of Tan- ganyika, ascertaining that this lake was not con- nected with the Nile. The search for the source of the Nile had come to be more and more Living- stone's preoccupation, and with this in view he withstood Stanley's entreaties to return with him to Europe. They parted with regret in Mar., 1872, and Livingstone turned to the exploration of the sources of the Lualaba. He discovered Lake Ban- gweolo, by a journey which took him largely through swampy and flooded country. His servants car- ried their sick master day after day, many a time through long reaches of water. At Tsfaitambo's village in Ilala they built him a hut and nursed him faithfully, until one morning they found his dead body in a kneeling posture by his couch. They embalmed his corpse, packed it in a bale of mer- chandise, and carried it in a wonderful funeral pro- cession, amid many perils, to the coast. On Apr. 18, 1874, it was deposited in Westminster Abbey. Livingstone the missionary developed into the pioneer of civilization, and ultimately into the geo- graphical explorer. But he never lost sight of the fact that only the Gospel could bring true succor to the peoples of Africa. During his very last journey, he still observed regular devotions with his attendants, and, as long as his strength lasted, divine worship on Sunday. The latest entries in his diary evince unswerving profound piety. His discoveries were carried further with much success by Stanley, and the African continent was opened to European civilization and to the colonial enterprises of ambitious nations. Although this is unhappily not always directed by a Christian spirit, yet mis- sionary work also has received a great impetus and achieved successful results in the spirit of the great pioneer, whose name can never be forgotten by the peoples of Africa. R. Grundemann. BIBLIOGRAPHY: The works of Livingstone consist of his Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa, Lon- don, 1857; Narrative of an Expedition to the Zambesi and its Tributaries, ib. 1865; and Last Journals, ed. H. Waller, 2 vols., ib. 1874. Besides the standard biography by W. G. Blaikie, London, 1888 and often,' other lives have been written by: J. S. Roberts, ib. 1874; S. Mossman, in Heroes of Discovery, Edinburgh, 1877; idem, Livingstone, the Missionary Traveller, London, 1882; J. Marratt, ib. 1877; A. Gavard and A. Perier. Paris. 1878; T. Hughes, London, 1891 and often; H. H. Johnston, ib. 1891; T. B. Maclachlan, Edinburgh, 1901; B. K. Gregory, Lon- don. 1906; and in DNB, xxxiii. 384-396. Further ma- terial is found in: H. M. Stanley. How I Found Living- stone, London, 1872; W. D. Cooley, Dr. Livingstone and the Royal Oeographical Society, London. 1874; C. F. Loriot, David Livingstone et sa mission sociale, Paris, 1881; R. Noel, Livingstone in Africa, London. 1896; and Sir Bartle Frere, in Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society, vol. xviii., 1874. LIVONIANS, CONVERSION OF THE. See Al- bert OF Riga; and Berthold of Livonia.
LLOYD, WILLIAM LLOYD, WILLIAM

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LLOYD, WILLIAM: Bishop of Worcester; b. at Tilehurst (18 m. w. of Windsor), Berkshire, Aug. 18, 1627; d. at Hartlebury Castle (4 m. s. of Kid- derminster), Worcester, Aug. 30, 1717. He studied at Oriel and at Jesus College, Oxford (B.A., 1642; M.A., 1646; B.D. and D.D., 1667), becoming a fellow of the latter college. He became a royal chaplain (1666), prebendary of Salisbury Cathe- dral (1667), vicar of St. Mary's, Reading, and arch- deacon of Merioneth (1668), dean of Bangor and prebendary of St. Paul's (1672), vicar of St. Mar- tin's-in-the-Fields (1677) and bishop of St. Asaph (1680). He was translated to the see of Lichfield and Coventry in 1692, and to the see of Worcester in 1700. He was one of the most indefatigable of>- ponents of Romanism under James II., and was one of the seven bishops who were imprisoned in the Tower June 8-15, 1688, for protesting against the Second Declaration of Indulgence. With the other bishops he was tried and acquitted June 29. He assisted at the crowning of William and Mary and shortly afterward became lord high almoner. He furnished material for Burnet's History of the Ref- ormaJtion of the Church of England (3 parts, London, 1679-1715), wrote many tracts, and also one val- uable work. An Historical Account of Church Govern- ment aa it was in Great Britain and Ireland when they first Received the Christian Religion (London, 1684; reprinted in T. P. Pantin's edition of Stil- lingfleet's Origines Britannicae, vol. ii., Oxford, 1842). BIBLIOGRAPHY: A valuable list of sources is appended to the article in DNB. xxxiii. 435-439. Consult: N. Salmon. Liv€9 qf Ote Englith Biahop; pp. 147-156, London. 1733; F. B. Howell. Complete CoUedion qf State Triali, xii. 183- 254, xiv. 545-560. ib. 1812; £. H. Plumptre. Life of Biakap Ken, i. 66. 140. 145. 293-316. ii. 1-10. 302. Lon- don. 1888: J. H. Overton, The Church in England, ii. 161 ■qq.. ib. 1897; W. H. Hutton, The Em/lieh Church (1626- 1714), pp. 227 aqq.. ib. 1903. LOBO, 161)6, JERONIMO: Portuguese Jesuit missionary; b. in Lisbon 1593; d. there Jan. 29, 1678. After teaching for a time in the Jesuit col- lege at Ck>imbra he went as a missionary to India in 1621, arriving at Goa in 1622. In 1625 he set- tled in Abyssinia as superintendent of missions in the kingdom of Tigr^, but some years later he was driven from the country, along with the patriarch and other Jesuit missionaries (see Abyssinia and THE Abyssinian Church, § 8). After trying in vain to enlist the pope and the Spanish and Portu- guese governments in a scheme to reclaim Abys- sinia to the Romish Church by force of arms, he returned to India in 1640 and became provincial of the Jesuits at Goa. In 1656 he returned to Lis- bon, where he spent the rest of his life. He wrote in Portuguese an account of his travels, which, it seems, has never been published. The manuscript is preserved in the monastery of St. Roque, Lisbon. Balthazar Tellez drew largely upon Lobo's work for his Historia general de Ethiopia a Alta (Coimbra, 1660), which has often been attributed to Lobo. Abb6 Legrand translated Lobo's work into French under the title Voyage historique de Abissinie (Paris, 1728), which was translated by Dr. Johnson as A Voyage to Abyssinia (London, 1735; new ed., 1887). LOBSTEIIf, lob'stain, PAUL: German Protes- tant; b. at Epinal (264 m. e.s.e. of Paris), Depart- ment of the Vosges, France, July 28, 1850. He was educated at the universities of Strasburg^ TQbingen, and G6ttingen, and in 1876 became privat-docent at the first-named institution. In the foUowing year he was appointed associate pro- fessor of theology at the same university, where he has been full professor since 1884. In theology he is a disciple of Reuss, A. Sabatier, and Ritschl. He has been associate editor of the works of Cal- vin in the Corpus Reformatorum, xxiii.-xxxii., xlv., and has written Die Ethik Calvin* s in ihren Orundtiigen entworfen (Strasburg, 1877); Petrus Ramus als Theolog (1878); La Notion de la pr^ existence du Fils de Dieu (Paris, 1883); Etudes christologiques (5 parts, 1885-94; the second part. La Doctrine de la naissance miraculeuse du Christ, 1890, was translated into English by V. Leuliette under the title The Virgin Birth </ Chrisi, London, 1903); La Doctrine de la Sainte-Ckne (Lausanne, 1889) ; Riflexions sur le bapUme des enfanls (Paris, 1892); Essai d*une introduction d la dogmatique protestante (Paris, 1896: Eng. transl. Introduction to Protestant Dogmatics, Chicago, 1902) ; Etudes sur la doctrine chrHienne de Dieu (Lausanne, 1906).
LOCI THE0L06ICI LOCI THEOLOGICI

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOCI THEOLOGICI: A term applied by Me- lanchthon to Evangelical systems of dogmatics and retained by many as late as the seventeenth cen- tury. The word was borrowed, as he himself says, from the usage of the classic rhetoricians, in whose works topoi or loci denote the places or sources from which proofs are deduced. Various system- atized indexes of these loci were made from the days of Aristotle, and mere formal categories, such as ** person," " nature," or " fortune," were also reckoned under this head. It was the particular task of the rhetorician, however, to trace the con- crete case, or ** hypothesis/' to the general, or ft " thesis." Thus were evolved loci communes, or arguments which could be applied to many spe- cific cases. The humanistic rhetoricians frequently confused loci communes with simple loci, or gen- eral basal concepts. This was especially true of Melanchthon, as is clear from his De rhetorica Itbri ires (Cologne, 1519), in which he sought to train students for disputation. He accordingly advised them to prepare lists of all possible loci communes, and to enter under the proper rubrics (capita) any examples gathered in the course of their reading Among theological loci communes he lists *' faith, " destruction of the body," " Church," " word of God," " patience," " sin," " law," " grace," " love," and ** ceremony." Elsewhere he defines loci comn munes as " certain general rules of living, of which men are persuaded by nature, and which I might not unjustly call the laws of nature." These two definitions, however, are not clearly distinguished and the discussion of the loci communes is conse- quently somewhat vague. This criticism applies also to the loci tkeologici of his famous Loci com- munes rerum theologicarum (1521), which are pri- marily basal concepts appearing in the science of theology, to which all in it must be referred. He accordingly begins with his favorite list ''God/' " one," " triple," and " creation," and closes with " condemnation " and ** beatitude." Although this list was derived from Peter Lombard, Melanch- thon's treatment is not only more clear than that of his predecessor, but he draws his examples from the Bible instead of from the Church Fathers, and under Pauline influence deduces, in addition to loci communes, certain loci communissimi, such as " sin," " grace," and " law." In view of the long and powerful influence of this book, the result of his failure to give a methodical proof of his series of loci was that Lutheran dogmatics was slow in reaching inherent unity. The term loci theologici gradually came to denote the content, and thus the chief passages of the Bible as included in the indi- vidual loci, although this meaning was forced into the background when Melanchthon laid more stress on the development of doctrine. For Lutheran theology Melanchthon 's book had the same importance which the work of Peter Lombard possessed for scholasticism. His loci were the subject of commentary as late as Leon- hard Hutter, and the term loci communes came to connote any work dealing with the sum of Christian doctrine. Among the Reformed the phrase loci communes was accepted by Wolfgang Musculus (Basel, 1560), Peter Martyr (London, 1576), Jo- hannes Maccovius (Franeker, 1639), and Daniel Chamier (Geneva, 1653). After the middle of the seventeenth century, however, with the rise of a more systematic treatment of dogmatics the term fell into disuse. (Johannes Kunze.)
LOCK, WALTER LOCK, WALTER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOCK, WALTER: Church of England; b. at Dorchester (8 m. n. of Weymouth), Dorsetshire, July 14, 1846. He was educated at Marlborough College and Corpus Christi, Oxford (B.A. 1869), and was fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford, in 1869-72, where he has been honorary fellow since 1897. He was assistant to the professor of humanity at St. Andrews in 1869-70, and from the latter year to 1897 was tutor of Keble College, Oxford, as well as subwarden in 1880-97 and warden since 1897. Since 1895 he has been Dean Ireland's pro- lessor of the exegesis of Holy Scripture in the University of Oxford, and was also examining chap- lain to the bishop of Lichfield in 1881-91 and to the archbishop of York since 1891, examiner in the Honour School of Theology in 1885-87, and select preacher to the university in 1889-90. He has edited Keble's Christian Year (London, 1895) and Lyra Innocentium (1899), and has written the essay on The Church in Lux Mundi (London, 1890); and on The Bible and The Old Testament in Oxford House Papers (1886-97); John Keble, a Biography (1892); St. Paul, the Master Builder (1899); and The Bible and Christian Life (1905).
LOMAN, ABRAHAM DIRK LOMAN, ABRAHAM DIRK

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOMAN, ABRAHAM DIRK: Dutch Protes- tant; b. at The Hague Sept. 16, 1823; d. at Am- sterdam Apr. 17, 1897. After completing his studies at the Lutheran and Mennonite seminaries at Amsterdam, he traveled through Germany and Switzerland. Returning to Holland in 1846 he be- came assistant pastor of the Lutheran Church at Maastricht, where he was pastor for a year (1848- 1849), after which he occupied a similar position at Deventer for seven years (1849-56). In 1856 he was appointed professor in the Lutheran sem- inary at Amsterdam, and in 1877, while still re- taining his chair in the seminary, he became pro- fessor in the university of the same city, despite the fact that he had been totally blind since 1874. In 1893 he retired from active life. As a theologian Loman belonged from the first to the so-called ** modem school "; as early as 1861 he had advanced the view in De Gtds that the Gos- pel account of the Resurrection was due to visions of the faithful. His main field was the New Testa- ment, although his only book was his Bijdragen ter inleiding op de Johanneiache echriften des Nxeuf wen TestamenU (Amsterdam, 1865), of which the first part alone, on the testimony of the Muratorian Canon to the Fourth Gospel, was actually published. Later he devoted himself to the synoptic Gospels in his Bijdragen tot de critiek der synoptieche evan- gelien (ThT, 1869-79). Here is manifest the be- ginning of the symbolic interpretation of the Gos- pels which he later developed. His view found its expression in his address on Hei oudste Christendom be- fore the " Free Congregation " at Amsterdam in Dec, 1881 (reprinted in Stemmen uit de Vrije Gemeente, Amsterdam, 1882), in which he declared that Christ was not a historic personality, but the incorpora- tion of a series of concepts and the symbolization and personification of thoughts and principles which were first fully developed in the Christianity of the second century, the passion and resurrec- tion being nothing more than the abasement and death of Israel and its revival as Christianity. The storm of opposition which this h3rpothesis aroused forced Loman to reconsider his attitude, and he 19 REUGIOUS ENCYCLOPEDIA IfOUards granted, in 1882, the historicity of Christ, but de- nied that he had founded Christianity. He made still further retractations in his D« oorsprong van het gdoof aan Jezua opstanding in De Gids, 1888, in which all trace of novelty disappears from his theory, since he grants the historic personality of Christ and the fact that he actually founded Chris- tianity, although still maintaining that the resiu^ rection represents merely the metamorphosis of the Jewish Messianic community into the world-wide Christian Church. Loman's symbolic theory of the Gospels now forced him to deny the authenticity of the Pauline epistles, for if they were actually written by Paul in the Apostolic Age, his Christological hypothesis would become untenable. In his QucutUmes Paiu- liruB (ThT, 1882-^), therefore, he distinguished between a " historic Paul " and a " canonical Paul," the former making a propaganda for the Jewish Messianic ideal outside Palestine, and the latter being merely a legendary figure. Loman was not only a theologian, but also a mu- sician, and composed a number of chorales and choruses, besides writing the libretto of an ora- torio in four acts on the Song of Solomon. BIBLIOGRAPHY: H. U. Meyboom has oontributed articles on Loman's life to De Oida, 1898, ii. 80-117, and to Le- veiuberidUen der afyetlorveti medeleden van ds Maataehap- pii der NtderlaruUdte LeUerkunde, 1808. 26-28, 69-72. and D. R. J. Vdlter has written in Jaarboek van de ko- ninkUjke Akademie van WetenecKappen^ 1899, pp. 3-36.
LOMBARDS LOMBARDS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOMBARDS: A warlike Teutonic tribe of the period of migrations. They are first mentioned by Strabo. Their oldest abode on the Elbe is recalled by such names as Bardowik and Bar- dengau. While settled here they were defeated by the Romans in the year 5 a.d. A few cen- turies later, driven doubtless by hunger, they wandered southeastward into the Danube region. Under the heroic Alboin they destroyed the Gepids, and in 568 entered Italy. In the course of the next few years they conquered northern and central Italy, and erected Pavia (Ticinum) into a royal residence. They failed to acquire Venice and Naples and the Grecian coast strips, as also Rome and Ravenna. The people they conquered became, for the most part, half free (aldiones). The few free men were excluded from public offices and army service, and all stood subject to Lombard law, and were ob- liged to make over to their district loxda a portion of the fruits of the soil. The several divisions of the people, classed as nobles, freemen, half-free, and serfs, were governed by kings of noble de- scent, endowed with conquered or confiscated estates, and qualified as army leaders, judges, lawgivers, and administrators. The leaders of army divisions were at first dukes during only a life term, but afterward they became heredi- tary princes with almost royal power, not a few of them, such as the dukes of Spoleto and Bene- vento, being nearly independent. Unfortunately for the Lombards, King Alboin was murdered by his eonsort in 572, and in 574 his successor was murdered. Then followed, under thirty-five dukes, A decade of turmoil, until an invasion of the Franks led to the election of the powerful Autharis. He overcame the rebellious, oonduded peace with the Franks, acquired the valley of the Po, and married the Catholic Bavarian Prin- cess Theodelinda. Under Theodelinda and her second consort, Agilulf, the Arian Lombards turned gradually to the Catholic faith. The royal pair founded and endowed churehes and cloisters, as at Monza and Bobbio, installed Catholic bishops, and had their son baptised and brought up in the new faith. It was mainly Gregory the Great who contributed to this tranformation. Notwithstanding some re- lapses into Arianism, the orthodox faith continued to spread; and in towns where there were a Catho- lic and an Arian bishop the former took precedence over the latter. However, in relation to the pope, the bishop preserved an attitude of independence. After 653 all the rulers and all the bishops were of the orthodox faith, and Milan was the ecclesiastical center of the realm. The reign of Rotharis (615), enlaiger of the king- dom and subduer of formidable dukes, is distin- guished by the promulgation of the Edict of Roth- aris (643), comprehending penal and private law, and for the first time affording written law. Though barbaric hi form it is humane in substance, and in- sures protection to the poor. Still more humane and equitable were the laws of Luitprand (712- 744), under whom the kingdom achieved its great- est prosperity. He mitigated slavery and com- bated abuses, such as premature abjuration of cloister vows and duels. His piety maniifested itself in the building of many churches, and in reverence of the popes, although the latter resisted his efforts toward the unity of Italy, which the fusion of Ro- mans and Lombards, already initiated, was to con- summate. After reiterated threats from Rome (under Gregory II. and III.), Pope Zacharias ob- tained peace from him (743), and the partial res- toration of Lombard conquests; likewise, from his successor Ratchis (744-749), who was friendly to the Romans, the relinquishment of the siege of Perugia. Ratchis was succeeded by his warlike brother Astolphus, whose resumption of menacing projects of unity drove Pope Stephen II. to an alli- ance with the Frankish King Pepin. In the course of two campaigns (754 and 756) Pepin won the capital, forced Astolphus to pay tribute, swear fealty, and surrender the exarchate of Ravenna, Emilia and PentapoUs, and places not as yet ceded, thus furnishing the nucleus for the temporal do- minion of the popes (see Papal States). Astol- phus' successor, Desiderius (756-774), was at first accommodating to the pope and the Frankish rulers; but after his power was well secured, he fell out with both Adrian I. and Charlemagne. In 774 Charle- magne conquered Desiderius, sent him to a cloister, confiscated the kingdom, and called himself king of the Franks and Lombards. Thus the unity of major Italy and the sovereignty over Rome was consum- mated by a Frankish, instead of by a Lombard king. However, the conqueror, as well as his son Pepin, the governor and king of the Lombards, still had to fight several momentous conflicts with the kinsmen of Desiderius, the dukes of Friuli and Benevento, The former obtained recognition of his Lombard possessions by way of Byzantium. H. Hahn. BIBLIOGRAPHY: The aouroes are in the reports of such Greek and Roman writers as Strabo and Tacitus, in Bysantine writers such as Procopius (in CSHB, vols, i.-iii.), Theo- phylaet (in Labbe's Corpua Hiatoria Bytaniina, Paris, 1648) and Theophanes (ed. C. de Boor, 2 vols., Leip- sio, 1885-87); also in MGH, Script, rer. Langob., ed. Waits, 1878; MOH, Leo., iv. 1868; C. Troya, Codies diplomaHeo lonoobardo, 6 vols., Naples, 1852-56; Dahl- mann and Waits, Quellenkunde der detUachen OeaehichUf Leipsie. 1905. The His^uaa^Lanoobardarum of Paulus Diaconus is translated by W. D. Foulke. New York, 1907. Consult: P. Balan. Romani e Langobardi, Modena, 1867; F. Dahn, Langobardiache Studien, vol. i., Leipsie, 1876; idem, Urgeachiehte der gennaniaehen und r&miachen Vdlker, vol. iv., chap. 7, Berlin, 1889; F. Bertolini, / Barbari. Storia delle domituuioni barbariaehe, S96-10t4, Milan, 1876; J. Weise, Italien und die Langobardenherracher^ Halle, 1887; J. TTrylgkin, Italy and her Invadera, vols, v.-viii., Oxford. 1895-99; L. M. Hartmann, Oeachiehte Italiena im Mitielalter, vols. i.-iii., Gotha, 1900-06; P. Villari, The Barbarian Invaaiona of Italy, 2 vols., London. 7 1902 (2d ed. of the Italian. MUan, 1905); L. Gauthier, Lea Lombarda dana lea Deux-Bourgognea, Paris, 1907; Gibbon, L^ecline and FaU, chap. xlv. and vol. v. 517-518; Neander, ^ ^hriatian Church, vol. iii. passim.
LONG, ALBERT LIMERICK LONG, ALBERT LIMERICK

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LONG, ALBERT LIMERICK: American Metho- dist Episcopal missionary; b. at Washington, Pa., Dec. 4, 1832; d. in Liverpool, England, July 28, 1901. He was educated at the Western Univer- sity of Pennsylvania, Pittsburg, and at Alleghany College, Meadville, Pa., graduating from the latter in 1852. He then studied theology in the Concord Biblical Institute (now Boston University), and entered the Methodist Episcopal ministry in 1857. In 1857 he was sent to Bulgaria as missionary of the Methodist Episcopal Church, where he labored until 1863, when he went to Constantinople to as- sist E. Biggs in revising the translation of the Bible into Bulgarian. From 1872 till his death he was a professor in Robert College, Constantinople. Be- sides the translation of the Bible, he wrote several hymns in the Bulgarian language, and also edited a Bulgarian periodical. LONG BROTHERS. See Monasticism; and Origenistic Controversies.
LONGLEY, CHARLES THOMAS LONGLEY, CHARLES THOMAS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LONGLEY, CHARLES THOMAS: Archbishop of Canterbury; b. at Boley Hill, near Rochester (27 m. s.e. of London), July 28, 1794; d. at Ad- dington Park, near Croydon (10 m. s.w. of Cam- bridge), Oct. 27, 1868. He received his preliminary education at Cheam, Surrey, and at Westminster; in 1812 entered Christ Church College, Oxford (B.A., 1815; M.A., 1818; B.D. and D.D., 1829); was reader in Greek in his college, 1822, tutor and censor, 1825-28, and proctor, 1827; meanwhile he took orders in 1818 and became curate at Cowley, then incumbent, 1823; was made rector of West Tytherley, Hampshire, 1827; was elected head master of Harrow, 1829, a post which did not serve to bring out his best qualities, since the discipline grew lax; became first bishop of the new see of Ripon, 1836, in this position gaining success in his c^podticm to Roman Catholic teaching, though at fiivt be received much blame which changed to praise after several ministers became Roman Cath- olics; he was translated to the see of Durham, 1856; became archbishop of York, 1860, and a privy ooimcilor the same year; was promoted arch- bishop of Canterbiiry, 1864. Two events of im- portance marked his primacy. The first was the deposition of Bishop John William Colenso (q.v.), in which Longley declared his belief in the un- soundness of Colenso's position respecting the docu- ments of the Hexateuch and in the le§^ty of his deposition. The second was the first meeting in 1867 of the Lambeth Conference (q.v.). His prin- cipal publications were chai^ges and sermons. Bibuoorapht: F. Arnold, Our Biahopa and Deana, i. 161- 168, London, 1875; A. R. Aahwell and R. O. Wilberforoe, Life of , . .8. WHberforee, pMsiin, London, 1880-82; DNB, xxxiv. 121-122.
LORD LORD

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LORD: A term of address occurring in both the Old and the New Testament. In both A. V. and R. V. it occurs in three forms: " Lord," " Lord," and " lord," and represents both different words and different usages of the same word. (1) In the Old Testament '' Lord " represents the divine name Yahweh or Yah (cf. I Kings viii. 39), trans- lated in the Septuagint by kurios. It should be noted that in Gen. xv. 2, 8; Isa. xxv. 8, and other passages the collocation Adonai Yahweh occurs in the Hebrew, and in Ex. xxiii. 17, xxxiv. 23, *Adon Yahweh, and in these cases Yahweh is rendered ** God " to avoid the collocation " Lord Lord." (2) In the Old Testament " Lord" is employed to render 'Adanay (a plural of excellence) when refer- ring to deity, especially in theophanies (cf. Gen. xviii. 3, XX. 4); also to render *Adon in such pas- sages as Ex. xxiii. 17 (Hebr. *Adon Yahweh), and the Aramaic Mare, Dan. ii. 47, v. 23. In the New Testament the A. V. usually renders kurio8 by " Lord " when referring to God or Christ; also despotes in Luke ii. 29; Acts iv. 24; II Pet. ii. 1; Rev. vi. 10 (the R. V. renders " Master " in the last two cases and in Jude 4 and puts the same word in the margin in the first two cases; in Jude 4 the A. V. translates " Lord God "). (3) In the Old Testament " lord " translates ten words which ex- press various kinds of superiority of station or author- ity, including even the theophanic angel of Josh. v. 14. In the New Testament it translates kurios, megiB- tan, and rabboni. Also see Jehovah; and Yahweh. LORD OF HOSTS. See Sabaoth.
LORD'S DAY LORD'S DAY

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LORD'S DAY: A designation of the first day of the week first found in Rev. i. 10, te kuriakl himera, Lat. Dominica dies. In the Didache, xiv. 1, kuriaki first appears as a noim with this meaning.
XXXVIII. LORD'S SUPPER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LORD'S SUPPER: " The Lord's Supper is a witness of the union which we have with Christ, inasmuch as he not only died and rose again for us once, but also feeds and nourishes us truly with his flesh and blood, so that we may be one in him, and that our life may be in common." " The bread and wine in the sacrament serve to our spir- ittuil nourishment, inasmuch as they show, as to our sight, that the body of Christ is our meat, and his blood our drink " (ui. 380. 381). The Scotch Confession of Faith (1560), Art. XXI.: *' The faithful in the richt use of the Lord's Table do so eat the bodie and drinke the blude of the Lord Jesus that he remains in them and they in him " (iii. 467-474). The Belgic Confession (1561), Art. XXXV.: " Christ that he might represent unto us this spiritual and heavenly bread hath instituted an earthly and visible bread as a Sacrament of his body, and wine as a Sacrament of his blood, to testify by them unto us, that, as certainly as we receive and hold this Sacrament in our hands, and eat and drink the same with our mouths, by which our life is afterward nourished, we also do as certainly receive by faith (which is the hand and mouth of our soul) the true body and blood of Christ our only Savior in our souls, for the support of our spiritual life " (iii. 428-431). The Heidelberg Catechism (1563), Ques. 76: *' What is it to eat of the crucified body and drink the shed blood of Christ? It is not only to embrace with a be- lieving heart all the sufferings and death of Christ, and there- by to obtain the forgiveness of sins and life eternal, but moreover, also, to be so united more and more to his sacred body by the Holy Qhost, who dwells both in Christ and in us, that although he is in heaven, and we are upon the earth, we are nevertheless flesh of his flesh, and bone of his bones, and live and are governed forever by one Spirit, as members of the same body are by the one soul " (iii. 332. 333). The ThiHy-Nine AHides of the Church of Eng- land (1562), Art. XXVIII.: '* The Supper of the Lord is not only a sign of the love that Christians ought to have among themselves one to an- other; but rather it is a Sacrament of our Redemption by Christ's death: insomuch that to such as rightly, worthily, and with faith, receive the same, the Bread which we break is a [heavenly and spirittuil] partaking of the Body of Christ; and likewise the Cup of Blessing is a partaking of the Blood of Christ " (iU. 605). So the Irish Articles of Religion (1615; iii. 542, 543). The Westminster Confession of Faith (1647), chap.
XXIX. LORD'S SUPPER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LORD'S SUPPER: " The Lord's Supper [is] to be observed for the perpetual remembrance of the sacrifice of himself in his death, the sealing of all benefits thereof with true believers, their spir- itual nourishment and growth in him, their further engage- ment in and to all duties which they owe unto him; and to be a bond and pledge of their communion with him, and with each other, as members of his mystical body.'' " Worthy believers do inwardly by faith, really and in- deed, yet not carnally and corporally, but spiritually receive and feed upon Christ crucified, and all the benefits of his death " (iii. 663-667). The Westminster Shorter Catechism (1647), Ques. 96: " What is the Lord's Supper? A sacrament wherein by the giving and receiving bread and wine, according to Christ's appointment, his death is showed forth, and the worthy re- ceivers are, not after a corporal and carnal manner, but by faith, made partakers of his body and blood, with all its benefits, to their spiritual nourishment and growth in grace " (iii. 607). The Confession of the Society of Friends (1675), Thirteenth Proposition: ** The communion of the body and blood of Christ is in- ward and spiritual, which is the participation of his flesh and blood, by which the inward man is daily nourished in the hearts of those in whom Christ dwells; of which things the breaking of bread by (%rist with his disciples was a figure, which they even used in the Church for a time, who had received the substance, for the cause of the weak; even as * abstaining from things strangled, and from blood '; the washing one another's feet, and the anointing of the sick with oil; all which are commanded with no lens authority and solemnity than the former; yet seeing they are but the shadow of better things, they cease in such as have obtained the substance " (iii. 797). Reformed Episcopal Articles of Religion (1875), Art. XXVII. : ** The Supper of the Lord is a memorial of our Redemp- tion by Christ's death, for thereby we do show forth the Lord's death till he come. It is also a symbol of the soul's feeding upon Christ. And it itf a sign of the communion that we should have with one another " (iii. 823). IV. The Liturgy in the Churches of the Reforma- tion.— 1. liuther and the liutheran Ghuroh: Al- though Luther hoped for a complete renewal of the whole life of the people by the preaching of a pure gospel, he did not try to attain this end by making his own external arrangement of the 1. liUther's ordinances of public worship. Look- First Form, ing upon himself as a member of the one Church, and bearing in mind how the people were accustomed to liturgical forms, he concluded to retain as much of the Roman mass as did not conflict with the word of God. His order for the celebration of the Lord's Supper is, there- fore, only to be fully understood by a comparison with the Roman Mass (q.v.). He kept the first part of it almost unchanged as far as the creed; but the introduction of a sermon at this point made a sharp division between the missa catechumenorutn and the ofTertory and canon which foUowed. In regard to the ofifertory of the mass, Luther declares in his Formula missa (1523) that from that point nearly everything savors of a sacrifice, and that ac- cordingly, repudiating all that has this meaning, he has retained what is pure and holy. On this basis, he struck out the ofTertory and the five following prayers, and went on, after the creed and sermon, to (a) the preface of the Roman mass, somewhat abridged, and then immediately to (b) the words of institution in Latin, beginning, as in the mass, " Qui pridie quam pateretur" but leaving out all 37 Lord's Sapper PomL. the additions not found in the Scriptural text and adding the Scriptural words ** quod pro vobis datur ** after " hoc est corpus meum *^; (c) the Sanctus and HosannOf during the singing of which (d) the ele- vation was to take place. Then followed (e) the Lord's Prayer, (0 the Paz Dominif (g) the Com- munion, during which the choir was to sing (h) the Agnus Dei. He left optional a prayer from the mass, and the old formula of administration ** Cor- pus (Sanffuis) Domini nostri Jesu Christi custodial animam tuam," The service dosed with (i) two post-communion prayers from the mass, (j) the Benedicamus DominOf to be sung invariably with the addition of Alleluia; (k) the blessing of Aaron (Num. vi. 24-27), which had never been used ex- cept in the Spanish liturgy. Three years passed between the publication of Luther's Formxda misses and his Deutsche Messe und Ordnung des Gottesdienstes. During this time a number of other services came into use. The earliest German mass known is that composed in 1524 by Kantz, a preacher of N6rd- ^•J^!^?!*" lingen. There is a Latin one of 1524 at Nuremberg, which in the following year began to be used in German with a few changes; this is characterized by the intro- duction of a German exhortation to the conmiuni- cants immediately before the Poor. The same feature is found in a Prussian vernacular service of 1525, but is lacking in the Strasburg order of the same year. Luther's new service of 1526 retained his earlier Latin form for week-days, but intro- duced the German form for Sundays. In the latter the preface was replaced by a paraphrase of the Lord's Prayer and an exhortation supposed to be written beforehand, of which Luther gives an ex- ample not intended to be binding; this was no in- novation, but a medieval custom, which seems to have arisen in South Germany. During the com- munion of the people, either a German paraphrase of the SanctuSf or another German hynm, or the Agnus Dei was to be simg, followed by a new Ger- man prayer. Although Luther did not regard the form drawn up by him as in any way generally obligatory, the types appearing in these two services became models for the Lutheran liturgies of the sixteenth century. These Kirchenordnungen may be gen- erally described as follows: At the beginning of the celebration, as prescribed by Luther, 8. Variant ^^j^g communicants were to take their places in the choir, the men on the south and the women on the north. The preface was either retained as in Luther's two forms, or replaced for ordinary Sundays by an ex- hortation, or both preface and exhortation were used. In Southern Germany a general confession and absolution followed. The same variety ap- pears in regard to the retention of the Sanctus and Hosanna, which were still sung in Latin in North Germany, elsewhere in either Latin or German. During the Sanctus, some liturgies prescribed three German prayers to be said by the celebrant; one for secular rulers, one for the ministers of the word, and one for Christian unity. Other new prajrers were added in different places before the liUtheran consecration. As the most important and indis- pensable part of the liturgy, all retained the words of institution, through which the real consecration of the elements for their sacred purpose was sup- posed to take place. Luther omitted the sign of the cross made over the elements, and no sixteenth- century service has it, while the Hanover form of 1536 directly forbids it. It is first mentioned in the Lutheran Church by Johann Gerhard in the be- gining of the seventeenth century as " an indiffer- ent ceremony," possessing " no spiritual force "; and afterward it occurs not infrequently. The breaking of the bread and the placing of a frag- ment of it in the chalice were dropped because the former was connected with the Roman Catholic theory of sacrifice, and the latter with the denial of the cup to the laity. Unleavened bread was still generally used, but the mixture of wine and water was discontinued; the recitation of the words of institution was ordered to be in a loud voice, con- trary to the Roman usage. The elevation of the elements after consecration was retained by Luther expressly for the sake of weak brethren who might be offended by too many striking changes in the service; and it was retained also in a number of sixteenth-century forms. The place of the Lord's Prayer, generally simg in German, varied. Though Luther had omitted the Pax Domini in his German mass, it was frequently retained in the light of a formula of absolution. The usual manner of dis- tribution was for the minister to communicate first himself and then the people, placing the bread di- rectly in their mouths. First the men and then the women were to approach; occasionally the young were to come before the old. Stress was frequently laid on provision that none of the consecrated ele- ments should remain or be thrown away at the con- clusion of the service. Luther first retained the Roman formula of administration as permissible, but gave no formula in his German mass. The other services show a great variety in this regard; but ultimately the struggle against Crypto-Calvin- ism (see Philippists) brought about an agreement to adhere either to something like the Latin form- ula, or to the other one which had been frequently used, '* Take and eat; this is the body of Jesus Christ, which is given for you." The later Lutheran formula came into use first in 1647 at Liibeck, where through Bugenhagcn's influence no formula had previously been used. The blessing of Aaron generally concluded the service after Luther's ex- ample. The old liturgies tended more and more to fall into disuse, under the influence of Pietism, with its depreciation of liturgical forms, and still more under that qf rationalism. The preface was al- most universally omitted and replaced by exhor- tations in the spirit of the time. The words of in- stitution, however, and the Lord's Prayer (the latter frequently in a weak paraphrase), were still considered essential. 2. Zwinffli: Zwingli at first (1523), in relation to the order of divine service, adhered to the canon of the mass; but in his treatise De canons misscB ejrichiresis he expressed himself with much severity about this part of the mass. In place of the offer- tory he inserted a general prayer. Then he went Lord** Supper 88 on much like Luther: preface, SanditSf prayer for a blessing on the reception, leading up to the words of institution, distribution, thanksgiving, the Nunc dimitiia or Song of Simeon, and the blessing. In 1525 he worked out an independent form of serv- ice, which was to be said, not sung. The conmiu- nicants being assembled in the choir, the minister first prayed, turning toward them, that they might be well prepared. Then followed the reading of I Cor. zi. 20-29; the Gloria in excdsis, recited al- ternately in German by the men and women; the salutation and response " The Lord be with you," '' And with thy spirit "; the reading of John vi. 47-63; the Apostles' Creed, also recited alternately; a short exhortation on the comfort and the solem- nity of the feast; the Lord's Prayer, and another prayer for worthy reception; and the words of in- stitution. For the communion, unleavened bread on wooden plates and wine in wooden cups was given to the communicants, seated, by appointed assistants; each broke off a morsel of the bread for himself and took the chalice in his hands. Then, after the recitation of Psalm cxiii. and a short thanksgiving, the minister dismissed the congrega- tion with " Go in peace." This form, which ex- presses the Zwinglian conception of the Lord's Sup- per as a profession of faith and devotion on the part of the congregation, was retained with slight variations in the later Zurich liturgies until 1675. According to the form of CEcolampadius, there was a preparation consisting of confession and absolu- tion, psalm-singing, a general prayer, and reading of the Gospel account of the Passion, after which a simple form of celebration followed, consisting of exhortation, the Lord's Prayer, words of institu- tion, communion, thanksgiving, and blessing. 8. The Beformed Servioes: After Farel had abolished the Roman mass in Geneva, Calvin in- stituted an independent liturgy in his La manikre de ceUhrer la chne. The Lord's Supper was to be celebrated once a year^ after a sermon on its signifi- cance and a prayer for worthy reception. The service then continued with the reading of I Cor. xi. 25-29 and an exhortation, which contained a solemn excommunication of grievous sinners and enemies of church unity, urged all to examine their consciences carefully, and gave comfort to those who were weak in the faith or tempted to despair. In the conclusion of this, the ancient Sursum corda was paraphrased according to Calvin's dogmatic conceptions: '' Let us lift up our hearts and minds thither where Jesus Christ is in the glory of his Father ... for our souls will be well disposed to be nourished and vivified by his substance, when they are thus raised above all things earthly, to reach heaven itself and enter into the kingdom of God, where he dwells." Then followed the com- munion, with the provision that the minister him- self should first receive it, then give it to the dea- con and then to the whole congregation, who were to approach the holy table. The formula of ad- ministration was the following (in French) : " Take and eat the body of Jesus, which was delivered up to death for you. This is the cup of the New Testa- ment in the blood of Jesus, which was shed for you." During the communion Psalm cxxxviii. was sung. followed by a prayer of thanksgiving, the Song of Simeon, and the blessing. Calvin's type of service was followed by the scattered Reformed commu- nities in Westphalia and on the Rhine. In Swit- zerland the Calvinistic and Zwinglian forms were combined and modified in such various ways that at least six different forms exist to-day. The order of service drawn up in 1550 by Johannes a Lasco (q.v.) for the Dutch refugees in England, the first complete order for the Calvinistic Reformed body, prescribes that on the day preceding the administra- tion of the Lord's Supper, a sermon is to be deliv- ered. At the time of the celebration, four cups and three pewter plates are to be set out on a table covered with a linen cloth. Another sermon is de- livered, ending with an exhortation forbidding the approach of those who have not yet made their profession of faith and put themselves under Chris- tian discipline or who have not given notice of their intention to receive. Then follow a prayer, the words of institution, and an exhortation to self- examination, after which the minister reads I Cor. V. 7, 8. The communion has the character of a family meal. The minister, elders, and members of the congregation sit around the table, as far as there is room. The minister takes a piece of the bread which is in the larger plate and, with the words, ** The bread which we break is the conmiu- nion of the body of Christ," divides it into small pieces on the other two plates, then handing it to those who sit near him with the words, " Take, eat, remember and believe that the body of our Lord Jesus Christ was given up to death upon the wood of the cross for the forgiveness of all our sins." The plates are then passed to those who sit further off and the same proceeding is observed in the ad- ministration of the cup, with corresponding words. First the men and then the women take their places around the table in turn, while John vi. and xiii.- XV. are read from the chancel. After the commu- nion, the service closes with a word from the minis- ter, thanksgiving, a psalm, and the blessing. The Dutch Reformed Church still maintains this order, in which is obvious the attempt to assimilate the celebration as much as possible to the brotherly fellowship at the table of the original institution. The Scotch Church also derives its form from the order of Johannes a Lasco, and, like the Reformed Church of France, gives a similar complexion to the celebration. 4. The Anfflioan ConixKiunion: In accordance with the general tendency of the English Reformar tion, a very large part of the Reformed service is taken more or less directly from the older liturgies, and even some parts which do not occur in the Roman mass have ancient precedent. Thus the prayer for the Church militant occupies the same position as the great intercession in the Gallican rite, and the recitation of the Ten Commandments, while probably due to the ethical tendency of the age, has been explained by some liturgical scholars as answering to the prophecy, or reading from the Old Testament, which in some other ancient litur- gies preceded the epistle and Gospel. Several por- tions newly added were intended to emphasise the aspect of the service as a communion; thus the 89 Lord** 8app«r prayer of Humble Access, the Comfortable Words, and the position and wording of the confession and absolution presuppose the reception of the commu- nion by the bulk of the congregation. The canon is mudi shortened, following the Roman closely in the essential part, and the Lord's Prayer, as scarcely ever elsewhere, follows the communion. The Gloria in excdsia retained its ancient position in the first Prayer-book of Edward VI., but was aftei^ ward moved to the end of the service, as an act of thanksgiving. See also Common Prater, Book of. V. Certain Points of Interest not Already Treated: In the primitive Church, the newly baptized were immediately admitted to commu- nion; and with the growing frequency of infant baptism the same custom was still maintained. C3rprian (De lapsia, ix.) speaks of children who at the outset of their lives have received ** the meat and drink of the Lord," and similar I. In&nt evidence may be collected from the Communion. Apostolic Constitutions, Dionysius the Aieopagite, Paulinus of Nola (d. 431), and Gennadius of Marseilles (c. 492). The neces- sity of communion to salvation being taught on the basis of John vi. 53, this argument is applied to the communion of infants by Augustine and by Inno- cent I. But evidences of the practise are not con- fined to the first six centuries, as some have con- tended; on the contrary, they come down as late as the twelfth, in which Paschal II. (1118) prescribes that the two elements are to be separately admin- istered " except to infants and those who are so weak that they can not swallow the bread," and Robertus Paululus speaks of the custom as extant, although beginning to disappear. A synodal or- dinance of Odo, bishop of Paris, in 1175, and a canon of the Synod of Bordeaux in 1255 attest its cessation in France, the latter prescribing the ad- ministration of blessed bread (see Eulogia) instead of the Host. It is a question whether the existence of the custom can be shown in Germany later than the twelfth century. The Council of Trent ruled finally (SeMW XXI. chap. 4) that children below the age of reason were bound by no necessity to sac- ramental oommimion of the Eucharist, ** although antiquity is not to be condemned for observing this custom in certain places and times." The Greek Church has retained the practise to the present day. The Evangelical chiu*ches, making admission to communion dependent on spiritual maturity as evi- denced by a special examination, have naturally not retained it. (Georo Rietbchel.) In the early Church it was customary to carry the consecrated elements immediately after serv- ice to the sick and to prisoners; and two passages in TertuUian (Ad uxorenif II., v.; De oratione, xix.) seem to imply the custom of conmiunicating at home under the species of bread even apart from illness. Later we find the consecrated 2. Commn- bread carried on joiumeys and used as nion of an amulet, a practise against which the Sick, more than one coimcil legislated. With the introduction of communion in one kind, it became usual to carry the consecrated bread to the sick immediately after mass or from the tabernacle in which it was reserved; and the strict enforcement of the rule of fasting communion made it desirable as obviating the necessity of the priest's having to celebrate in the afternoon or evening for a person in sudden danger of death. In the Church of England a special service is provided for the celebration of the communion in the sick-room, somewhat shorter than the usual form; but in re- cent years, with the growth of the practise of reser- vation, the elements are not infrequently carried from the church and administered with a brief form of prayer. The Lutheran Church freely allows pri- vate communion, while the Reformed discourages it. In the pre-Reformation Church the principal re- quirements for a worthy reception of the sacra- ment were freedom from sin and fasting from the previous midnight. Both of these are strictly re- quired in the Roman Catholic Church at the pres- ent day. The former is imposed as a matter of ab- solute necessity in the case of mortal 3. Require- sin, when confession must invariably ments for precede communion; in practise con- Communi- fession is usually recommended to in- cants. frequent communicants, even though they may not be conscious of having committed a mortal sin since their last communion. The question of the frequency of communion is one which has been much discussed at different times. It is generally admitted that in the Apostolic Age it was received, if not daily, at least on Sunday, Wednesday, and Friday. As the zeal of the days of persecution diminished, it became less frequent, and Cluysostom had to rebuke those who com- municated only once a year. In Africa as late as Augustine's day once a week was the usual mini- mum. The second Synod of Tours (850) required at least three times a year; but by the Lateran Council of 1215 the Church had come to limit the actual requirement to once a year, at Easter. In the sixteenth century the frequency once more in- creased, under the influence of Ignatius and Philip Neri, and was spoken of as highly desirable by the Council of Trent. The Jansenist and Quietist movements in France (especially through Amauld's treatise De la friquente communion) tended to di- minish it once more, and the laxity of modem times makes it usual for even fairly devout people to communicate at most once a month. In the Anglican communion, after the Reformation, the frequency of administration fell in most places to four times a year, or at most once a month, imtil the High-church revival of the nineteenth century restored it to normally once a week and in many places daily, with a consequent increase in the fre- quency of communion. In the other Protestant churches the quarterly administration is the most usual. The requirement of fasting, for which there is early evidence, was prescribed as a matter of reverence. In modem Roman Catholic practise the exceptions which excuse from it are serious illness and the necessity of protecting the sacred species from profanation or of completing the mass in the case of a sudden indisposition of the cele- brant. This rule also is increasingly emphasised in the Anglican Communion under present condi- tions, but does not occur in the other Reformation churches, which content themselves with requiring Lord's Supper Lorimor 40 a general condition of faith and repentance. As to the first admission to communion, they usually require a formal ceremony of recognition of mem- bership or the like; according to the rubric of the Anglican Prayer-book ** none shall be admitted to the Holy Conmiunion except he be confirmed, or be ready and desirous to be confirmed/' The original Lutheran and Calvinist types of ad- ministration have been noted above. The mode of administration in non-Episcopal churches in America and England is almost uni- 4. Practises form. The elements are consecrated Connected by prayer by the minister, who breaks with as much bread and pours out as much Adminis- wine as he deems sufficient. He re- tration. peats the words of institution ; he then hands the elements for distribution to the elders or deacons, who serve him first and then pass to the other communicants sitting in their pews. In the Anglican Communion and also in many Lutheran churches the communicants kneel at the chancel rail. In the German Reformed Church they stand. On modem sanitary princi- ples an agitation has recently been made in America for the introduction of individual communion cups, and the movement has slowly spread very widely. For communion in both kinds see Mass, II., 5. BiBLtOQRAPHT: On the general subject the works cited under Eucharist should be consulted, as also those under Tbansubstantiation. On I. consult: The works cited in Biblical Introduction, II.. especially those of Weiss and Beyschlag; J. Q. Scheibel. Das AbendmaM de» Herrn, Breslau, 1823; D. Schuls, Die chrUUiche Lehre vom Abend- mahl nach dent Qrundtext dee N. T., ib. 1824; J. J. I. von Dfillinger, Die Lehre von der Eucharistie in den drei eraten Jakrhunderten, Mains. 1825; F. W. Lindner, Die Lehre vom Abendmahl nach der Schrift, Hamburg, 1831; K. F. A. Kahnis, Die Lehre vom Abendmahl^ Leipsic, 1851; L. J. Rflckert, Dae Abendmahl^ aein Weeen und eeine Ge- ediichte in der alien Kirche, ib. 1856; C. T. Keim, Ge- aehiehte Jeau von Nazara, iii 266, Zurich, 1872, Eng. transL, 6 vols.. London, 1875-82; H. Schults, in TSK, 1886; P. Lobstein, La Doctrine de la aainte ehie, Lausanne, 1889; Hamack. in TU, viL 2. 1891; T. Zahn. Brot und Wein im Abendmahl der alien Kirche, Leipsic, 1892, cf. Hamack in TLZ, no. 15. 1892; A. Jdlicher, in Theolo- giache Abhandlunoen , . , K. von Weizadcker getndmet, Freiburg, 1882; C. Weixs&cker, Daa apoatoliache ZeitaUer, pp. 574 sqq., Freiburg, 1892, Eng. transl.. The Apostolic Age, 2 vols., London, 1894-95; F. Spitta, Zur Geachichte und LiteraturdeaUrchriatentuma, vol. i., Gdttingen, 1893; E. Grafe, in Zeilachrift far Theologie und Kirche, 1895. part 2. pp. 101-138; F. Schulten, Daa Abendmahl im N. T., Gdt- tingen, 1895; A. C. McGi£Fert, Hiat. of Christianity in the Apoatolic Age, pp. 68 sqq. et passim, New York, 1897; A. Eiohhom, Daa Abendmahl im N. 7., Leipsic, 1898; SohafF, Chriatian Church, i. 471-474; and the oommen- tarira on the basal passages. On II (history of the doctrine in the Church) consult: Hamack, Dogma, vols, i., ii, iv., v., vii. and, in general, the treatises on the history of doctrine; the works of Doninger, Kahnis and RQckert, ut sup.; F. C. Baur, in TUbinger Zeitachrift far Theologie, 1839. pp. 56-144; J. H. A. Ebrard, Daa Dogma vom heiligen AbendnuJU und aeina OeachichU, 2 voki., Frankfort. 1845-46; J. W. Nevin, The Myatieal Preaence; Vindication of the Reformed or Calviniatic Doctrine of the Holy Euchariat, Philadelphia, 1846; W. J. E. Bennett, The Euchariat; Ua Hiat, Doc trine, and Practice, London, 1851; J. W. F. Hdfling, Die Lehre der tUteaten Kirche vom Offer, Erlangen, 1851; R. Wilberforoe, The Doctrine of the Holy Euchariat, London. 1853 (Anglican traetarian); A. W. Dieckhoff, Die evan- geliadte Lehre im ReformationaaeitaUer, Qdttingen, 1854; R. Halley, The Saeramenta, part II., The I^ord'a Supper, London. 1855; P. Freeman, Ttt4 Principles cf Divine Service, 2 parts. Ix>ndon, 1855-62; E. Bickersteth. A rreatiss on the Lord's Supper, ed. L. W. P. Balch, New York, 1857; E. B. Pusey. The Real Presence of the Body and Blood of our Lord in the Holy Eudtarist, Oxford. 1857; G. F. Maclear, The Witness of the Eucharist, Lon> don, 1864; G. £. Steitx, in JahrbOcher far deutsche The- ologie, ix (1864), 409-481, x (1865). 64-162, 399-463. xi (1866). 193-253, xii (1866), 211-286. xiii (1868), 3-66. 649-700; J. B. Dalgavins, The Holy Communion, iU Philosophy, Theology and Practice, New York, 1868 (Ro- man Catholic); H. Schmid, Der Kampf der lutheriachen Kirche um Luther s Lehre vom AbendmcJU im Reformations- zeilalter, Leipsic, 1868; J. Harrison, Ansujer to Dr. Pusey' a Challenge respecting the Doctrine of the Real Presence, 2 vols., London, 1871 (Anglican Low-church); J. Mack- naught, Ccena Domini, ib. 1878 (on the doctrine of the Anglican (Jhuroh); H. Schults, Zur Lehre vom heiligen Abendmahl, Ck>tha, 1886; L. Lansoni, The Names of the Eucharist, Dublin, 1887; J. P. Lilley, The Lord's ^Supper, . . . iU Origin, Nature and Use, Edinburgh, 1891; F. L. Renx, Opfercharakter der Eucharistie nach der Lehre der V&ter der drei ersten Jahrhunderte, Paderbom, 1892; J. R. Milne, Doctrine and Practice of the Eucharist, Ix>ndon, 1895; J. Wilpert, Fractio panis. Die altesU Daratellung des eucharistischen Opfers in der " CapeUa Grceca," Frei- burg, 1895; J. Smend. Die evangelischen deutschen Mes- sen bis zu Luther s Deutscher Mease, Gottingen, 1896; J. Behringer, Die heUige Kommunion in ihren Wirkungen, Regensburg, 1898; A. Naegle. Die Eucharistidehre des . . . J. Chrysoatomua, Freiburg, 1900; V. Schmitt, Die Verheiaaung der Eucharistie bei den Vdtern, WQrsburg, 1900; C. (jore. The Body of Christ; an Inquiry into the Institu- tion and Doctrine of Holy Communion, London, 1901; W. Gdtimann, Das eucharistische Opfer nach der Lehre der tUtern Scholastik, Freiburg, 1901; A. G. Mortimer. Euchar- istie Sacrifice; historical and theological Inreatigation of the sacrificial Conception . . . in the Catholic Church, London, 1901; R. M. Adamson, Christian Doctrine of the Lord's Supper, Edinburgh. 1905; J. C. Hedley, The Holy Eucharist, London, 1907. On IV. consult: Sammlung liturgiacher Formulare der evangelisch-liUherischen Kirche, part 3. Nordlingen. 1842; A. L. Richter, Die evangelischen Kirchenordnungen des 16. JahrhunderU, Weimar, 1846; H. A. Daniel. Codex liturgicus, vols., ii.-iii., Leipsic, 1847-53; J. W. F. Hof- ling, Liturgisches Urkundenbuch, viii. 75 nqq., Schwerin, 1861; L. Schdberlein, Schatz des liturgisclien Chtfr- und Oemeindegesangs, vol. i.. Gdttingen. 1865. On V. consult: W. Vaux, The Benefita Attached to Par- ticipation in ... the Lord's Supper, Oxford, 1826; A. N. Arnold, Prerequisites to Communion, Boston, I860: T. W. Perry, Historical Considerations Relating to the Declaration on Kneeling in . . . the . . . Book of Com- mon Prayer, London. 1863; F. Hall. Fasting Reception of the Blessed Sacrament, ib. 1882; J. W. Kempe. Reserva- tion of the Blessed Sacrament, ib. 1887; R. Shiells. The Story of the Token as Belonging to ... the Lord' a Supper, New York. 1892; J. Hughes-Games. Evening Communion, London, 1894; R. V. Bury. Vinum sacramenti; critical Examination of the Nature of the Wine of the Holy Com>- munion, Dublin, 1904; C. R. Davey Birks, The Lord^s Supper; Text of the (Anglican) Service Explained, Ox- ford, 1905; S. Phillips, The Communion of the Sick, Lon- don, 1905. LORD'S TABLE. See Altar, III., 2, § 2.
LORIUSR, GEORGE CLAUDE LORIMER, GEORGE CLAUDE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LORIMER, GEORGE CLAUDE: American Bap- ti.st; b. in Edinburgh, Scotland, June 4, 1838; d. at Aix-les-Bains (40 m. s.s.w. of Geneva), France, Sept. 8, 1904. He came to the United States in 1356 and wtudieil at Reorgctown College, Ky. He was pastor at Harrodsburg, Ky. (1859); Paducah (lSGO-68); Albany, N. Y. (1808-70); Boston (1S70-70); Chicago (1879-00); Boston (1891- 1902); and New York (1902-04). He was the author of: UjuIit the Ei'eryreeng {Boston, n, d.); Greal Conjlid: Discourse concerning Baptittt and Rdiffioua Belief {IS77); I smg olii ami new {Chicago, 1881); Jtmis. tlie World's .Sanour (18S3); Stadia in Socitd Life (1886); Baptiitt in llintory (Boston, 1803); Argavwnl for Christianity (Philadelphia, IHOi): Menmgej of Today to the Men of Tomomna (1896); Ckriitianity and the Social State (1898); Christianity in the 19th Century (1000); Master of MiUiom (New York, 1903); and The Modem Crisis in Religion (19tM); and edited the People'e BQiU Uiilory (2 vols,, Chicago, 1896),
LORIHEB, PETER LORIMER, PETER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LORIMER, PETER: English Presbyterian,' b. in Edinburgh June 27, 1812; d. at Whitehaven (36 m. s.w. of Carlisle), Cumberland. July 29, 1879. He was the son of a master builder who occupied a good position in his native city. He received the elements of his education at George Heriot's Hos- pital, Edinburgh, and proceeded from the hospital to Edinburgh University. Here he passed through the classes of the arts curriculum with much credit, and also took his theological course, the professor of divinity at the time being Dr. Thomas Chalmers, to whom, as a teacher, Dr. Lorinier always acknowl- eilgcd the highest obligations. In ll!S36 he was or- dained iia minister of the Presbyterian Church, liiver Terrace, Lonrlon, connected with the Church of Scotland. In 1843, with his congregation, hs ca.-'t in hii lot with the Free Church. In 1845 he was appointed professor of Hebrew and Biblical criticism in the theological college of the English Presbyterian Church, then newly established in London, and in 18T8 he was made principal. Hia mast important writings are: a life of Patrick Hamilton (Edinburgh, 1857), the first of a pro- jected series of worjis on the precuraors of Knox; The SeolUeh Ileformation (London. 1860); Jahn Knor and the Cburrh of Knglaiui (1875), founded on the Knox [lapcrs preserved among the Morrioe manutcripts; two lectures on The Kviiteniial Value of the Early KpiMle* of St. Paul (1874); The KvitlFnre. to Ckriiiliiinity Arising from its Adaptation In All the Deeper Wants qf the Human Heart (1875); and a translation with notes of vol. t (containing Wyclif's jienional history) of G. V. Lechlcr's Jo- honn Tim Wiclif and rfie Vorgeschichte der Reforma- tion (John Wielff anrl htn English Predecessors, 2 voU., London. 1878; new eris. 1881, 1884). W, I.KEt, revised by Hknrv Cowan.
LOT LOT

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOT: The son of Haran and nephew of Abram. According to the story in Genesis, in his migration from Haran to Canaan and Egypt, Abram was accompanied by Lot (Gen. xii. 4), but afterward Lot separated from Abram (xiii. 1 sqq.), and set- tle<l in the plain of Jordan at Sodom, where he was taken captive, but was liberated by Abram (xiv. 1 sqq.). He incurred still more danger in the ca- tastrophe brought by God upon the vale of Siddim 45 Los ▼on Rom I<ots, Hebrew Use of (xviii.-xix.). The angels, appointed to investi- gate the iniquity of the Sodomites, were hospitably received by Lot, who in order to fulfil the duties of hospitality was even ready to sacrifice his own family, while on the other hand the Sodomites, in their lust, trampled under foot the rights of the strangers. So the angels protected the family of the righteous Lot and rescued them from the judg- ment of Sodom. Lot's sons-in-law mocked at the warning and stayed in the city. Lot himself had to be torn away by force (xix. 16 sc|q.). Lot was bidden not to look about him. neither to rest till he came to the mountains. But this was beyond his strength, so he begged leave to remain in Zoar, according to Gen. xiii. 10, the southernmost point of the vale of Siddim. Lot's wife could not refrain from looking back, and by thus transgressing that express prohibition she brought about her own pimishment, for she was turned into a pillar of salt. (This detail is consistent with the nature of the Dead Sea, which is so saturated with salt that its vapor deposits a salty crust on surrounding ob- jects.) Hence she stood conspicuous, a pillar of salt on the shore (Luke xvii. 32; cf. Wisdom, x. 7; Josephus, Ant., I., xi. 4). The judgment is described as a rain of fire and brimstone (cf. Ps. xi. 6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22), in con- sequence of which the whole region became deso- late. That the latter was a historic event is undoubted. It profoimdly impressed the surround- ing peoples, and was borne in mind, especially in Israel, throughout all ages as a remarkable divine judgment (cf. Deut. xxix. 22; Amos iv. 11; IIos. xi. 8; Isa. i. 9, iii. 9; Jer. xx. 10, xxiii. 14; Zeph. ii. 9). The classic writers also speak of the catas- trophe. Strabo, xvi. 2, knows of thirteen cities that were destroyed in that region; whereas he ascribes the origin of the sea to earthquakes, vol- canic eruptions, and hot springs of both asphalt and brimstone. Tacitus, Hi^t. v. 7, tells of a monstrous fire that swept this district, kindled by lightning. Even the geographical nature of the Dead Sea might vouch for that violent eruption of destructive elements: at a!l events, to render it more easily conceivable. See Palestine. It is consistent with the Biblical narrative, according to which only the valley plain was stricken by the shower, that the surrounding mountain ranges ex- hibit no traces of volcanic disturbance. The Dead Sea, to be sure, did not owe its original existence to the catastrophe; it was then, however, that the southern tract of the sea subsided. Lot did not stay in Zoar, but went up into the mountains with his two daughters, and lived there in a cave. His daughters thinking they could obtain no husbands in that isolated situation, unlawfully contrived to get offspring of their father by stealth: a circum- stance recalled by the Hebrews in the names Moab and Ammon (Gen. xix. 38). However, it might be noted that the story is passibly taken from the genea- logical tradition of Moab and Ammon, since in the estimation of primitive antiquity, it was of so high importance for a woman to obtain posterity tliat in order to achieve this end she would not scruple even at incest, and that in fact people would regard such oonduct of the tribal mothers even in a heroic light. As touching the entire scope and content of the story of Lot, the same is no product of Jewish fancy, but rather arose from the tradition which was a common heritage of Abraham's people, and one very tenacious of local recollections. The whole tenor of the relation harmonizes with that patriarchal era when those simpler Semitic pastoral tribes contrasted to advantage, especially in mat- ters of hospitality, with the inhabitants of the Ca- naanitic towns; and the most devout of them were s upposed to enjoy more immediate conversation nvith the deity than was later the case with the people of God themselves. For description of the region see Moab; Palestine. C. von Orelli. Bibliography: The commentariGB on GeneHia deal with the nubject, as do some of the works on Old Testament the- ology. Consult: DB, iii. 150-162; EB, m. 2824-25; JE, viii. 185-186. The Koran has many passages which embody traditions, partly of Talmudic origin, regarding Lot.
FERDIMAHD LOTZ, WILHELM PHILIPP FRIEDRICH

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOTZ, WILHELM PHILIPP FRIEDRICH: German Lutheran; b. at Cassel Apr. 12, 1853. He was educated at the univer- sities of Leipsic (Ph.D., 1879; lie. theol., 1883) and G6tti[]gen, and in 1SS3 became privat-docent at the former institution. In the same year he went to Erlangen as privat-docent and tutor, but in 1884 accepted a call to Vienna as associate pro- fessor of Old-Testament exegesis in the Evangel- ical theological faculty. He was promoted to a full professorship there In 1884, a position which he held until 1897, when he was appointed to his present post of professor of Old-Testament exe- gesis at Erlangen. He has written: Die Imchriflen Txglalhpileeer't I. in irarwscnSiertem atsyritchem Grundtexl mil UeberteUung und Kommeniar (Leip- sic, 1880); QuiEBtionea de hUlona aabbaU (1883); Gctdtichte und OffetAanmg im Allen Teatament (1891); Die Bundealade (1901); Dot AUe TeOa- merd und die Wiitmachafl (1905) ; Die hMi»tht Ut- guehichie in ihrem VerhSUnia tu den UTTeitaagen anderer VOlkfT, ru den isTarlilitfJun VotkienaUungen und zum Qamen der Heiligen Schri/t (1907); and HOtraisdie Sprachtekre (1908).
LOUIS IX. LOUIS IX.

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOUIS IX. : King of France and Roman Catholic saint; b. at Poissy (12 m. n.w. of Paris) Apr. 25, 1215; d. before Tunis Aug. 25, 1270. His father, Louis VIII., died when he was only eleven years old, and he ascended the throne under the regency of his mother, Blanche of Castile (Nov. 15, 1226). His mother, a pious and very capable woman, had him educated by brothers of the Fran- ciscan and Dominican orders. During the first years of his reign his nobles and later the bishops of the realm gave him much trouble, but he at last restored order in his kingdom. In fulfilment of a vow made on a bed of sickness he imdertook a crusade (1248). In August he sailed for Cyprus, the rendezvous of the cnisaders, with an army of 40,000. The next spring he set sail for E^^ypt, and landed at Damietta June 4, 1249. He took the town without a blow, then d&> feated a Mohammedan army and advanced up the Nile to Mansurah, whence he had to retreat, after fighting a battle with the Saracens. The king and his whole army were taken captive, but after tedi- ous negotiations were set free for a large ransom. With the remnant of his army, scarcely 6,000 men, Louis sailed to Acre and stayed in the Holy Land four years, only returning to France when recalled by the death of his mother whom he had left as regent (Nov., 1252). He imdertook a pilgrimage to Nazareth in thankfulness for his release from captivity. In 1270 he led another crusade to Tunis, landing in July at the site of Carthage, where a pestilence broke out in his army to which the king himself succumbed. His son Philip III. made peace with the emir and returned to France, carrying the ashes of his father. Louis was canonized by Boniface VIII., Aug. 11, 1297; his day is Aug. 25. From his earliest child- hood he was of a pious disposition and delighted in prayers and penances. Although naturally gentle, Louis was intolerant toward heretics and in- fidels, and was accustomed to say that the only way to deal with a Jew was to strike him with your sword. He was also superstitious; he brought back from the Holy Land the crown of thorns and a portion of the true cross, for which he built the Sainte-Chapelle in Paris. The authenticity of the famous Pragmatic Sanction of 1269 (q.v.) has been questioned. In this document he asserts the inde- pendence of the Gallican Church against the claims of the pope. Bibliography: The lives of Louis are very numerous; the most noted is by Le Nain de Tillemont. ed. J. de Gaulle. 6 vols., Paris, 1846-61. Others are by A. Mignon, ib. 1853; J. A. Faure, 2 vols., ib. 1866; F. P. G. Guisot. Oreat Chriatiana of France, St. Leuia and Calvin, London, 1860; Hermitte. ib. 1876; V. Verlaque. ib. 1886; C. V. Langlois. ib. 1886; H. Wallon. 2 vols..ib. 1887; M.Sepet. ib. 1808; M. H. F. Delaborde. ib. 1800. Consult further, P. VioUet. Let £tabliaaemenU de S. Louie, 4 vols., ib. 1881- 1886; J. Miohelet. PhUippe-Auottate et iS, Louie, ib. n.d.; A. Lecoy de la Marche, S, Louie, eon oouvemement et aa politique, ib. 1887; E. Berger, S. Louie et Innocent IV., ib. 1803; S. de Froissart, S. Louie et lea eroiaadee, ib. 1806; M. Fromman. Landgraf Ludvaig III. der Fromnne, Jena, 1007; and the literature under Crusadss.
LOURDES LOURDES

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOURDES: A city of France in the department of the Hautes-Pyr^n^es, situated near the river Gave-du-Pau about 22 miles s.e. of Pau. Lourdes was a fortified town as far back as the time of the Caesars and still possesses a chAteau fort. The in- habitants number about 5,000. During the last half century Lourdes has become famous through- out the Roman Catholic world in consequence of the series of alleged apparitions of the Virgin Mary to Bernadette Soubirous, a child of the town, in 1858. The girl, who at that time was fourteen years of age, is described as being somewhat in- firm in health, and inferior both in physical and mental development to the average child of her age. She belonged to a poor peasant family, and was simple and ignorant, knowing neither how to read nor write, and unable to speak French — her language being the patois of the locality. The story of the apparitions, which were seen only by Bernadette, is as follows: On Thursday, Feb. 11, 1858, in company with her sister Marie and Jeanne Abadie, a playmate of about the same age, she went to gather sticks for fire-wood along the banks of the Gave in the suburbs of the town. Arriving at a mill-race near a grotto in the mountain side, the two companions crossed over, and Bernadette, intending to do the same, remained behind a few minutes in ordev to remove her shoes and stock- ings. While thus occupied she was startled by a noise as of a great wind, though the atmosphere was at the time quite calm. In a moment her at- tention was drawn to a briar-bush growing beneath a kind of natural niche at the opening of the grotto. The bush seemed agitated; a *' golden cloud " ap- peared above it, and above tho cloud in front of the niche appeared the form of a woman. She was youthful and beautiful in appearance, robed in white with a blue sash around her waist. Her feet were bare but on each was a gold-colored rosette, and in her hands was a rosary of white beads strung on a golden chain. She smiled graciously and beckoned to Bernadette to approach. The latter obeyed and at the same time began instinc- tively to recite her beads. The lady then assumed an attitude of silent prayer, reciting, however, with Bernadette the Gloria Patri at the end of each decad. In the mean time the other two com- panions had returned. They were naturally sur- prised to find Bernadette on her knees praying in such a place, and seeing nothing themselves to ac- count for her enraptured gaze, they laughed at her and brought her home. Here the experience was treated as an illusion and the girl was forbidden to return to the grotto. On the following Sunday, however (Feb. 14), she obtained permission to re- visit the place in company with a few children of her own age. She again saw the same vision and soon went into an ecstasy from which she was aroused by a woman living near, who was attracted to the scene by the other girls who, though seeing nothing, were amazed and alarmed at the changed appearance of their companion. After this expe- rience she was again restrained from going to the grotto, but a few ladies of the town moved by curiosity brought her back on Feb. 18. The mys- terious lady appeared as before, and speaking to Bernadette asked her to return to the place daily for a fortnight. She promised to do so. and on the three following days (Friday, Saturday, and Sunday) the same experiences were enacted at the grotto in the presence of an ever-increasing crowd of spectators. Nothing was seen by any of them, but they were all deeply impressed by the ecstatic expression on the features of the little girl. In- deed, so great had become the crowd of onlookers that the civil authorities saw fit to interfere, and the day following a couple of policemen were de- tailed to accompany Bernadette to the grotto, but on this occasion nothing was seen. The next day, however, the vision again appeared and also on the following day (Feb. 24) on which occasion Bernadette received a command from the lady to dig a hole in the ground at the entrance of the grotto. This she did with her bands, and at once a stream of water appeared (the place had previ- ously been perfectly dry) which gradually increased in volume until it became a settled perennial spring furnishing water in abundance for the piscinas and taps used by the pilgrims (about 33,000 gallons per day). The apparition was seen again on Feb. 26, and on the 27 th, when Bernadette received the com- mand to " go and tell the priests to build a chapel '' at the spot. On Sunday, Feb. 28, the experience took place in the presence of more than 2,000 spectators. The phenomenon recurred on the two following days, but on Mar. 3 nothing was seen. Mar. 4 was the last of the fifteen days on which Bernadette had promised to visit the grotto. A multitude of 15,000 expectant persons crowded about the place; the vision came as usual, but nothing extraordinary occurred. Bernadette returned on the following days but nothing appeared until Mar. 25 (feast of the Annunciation), when in answer to Bernadette 's request that the mysterious lady tell her name, she received the reply: " I am the Im- maculate Conception." Twelve days passed with- out any further manifestation, but on Apr. 7 the vision was renewed, and still again three months later, July 16. This was the eighteenth and last apparition. From the outset the local ecclesias- tical authorities held aloof and showed themselves scarcely less skeptical than the civil functionaries. Bernadette was put through long and trying inter- rogatory ordeals on the part of both, but she main- tained her story even to its details without con- tradicting herself imder severe cross-examination, and it remained the conviction of her examiners that she was truthful and sincere in relating her experiences. In this connection it is worth noting that she never sought notoriety or any pecuniary advantage as a result of the visions, and besides, it was freely admitted as inconceivable that one so young and so mentally deficient could concoct and successfully carry out a deceptive scheme of such magnitude. Shortly after the events above re- lated she went to Uve with the Hospital Sisters established in the town, and it was only when she was eighteen years of age that she finished learn- ing how to read and write. She later became a member of the order at the age of twenty-two and went to live in the convent of Nevers, where she died at the age of thirty-five. Apart from the ap- paritions at the grotto she never had any extraor- dinary psychic experience. The great sensation produced by the apparitions, and the repeated assertion that miracles were being wrought at the grotto, made it necessary for the local church authorities to make an investigation, and an episcopal commission to that effect was appointed by Mgr. Laurence, bishop of Tarbes, in July, 1858. The inquiry referred not only to the apparitions, but also to the alleged miraculous occurrences, and the results were embodied in a report submitted to Mgr. Laurence four years later. It was favorable throughout to the miraculous and supernatural character of the episodes, and in Jan., 18()2, the bishop issued a decision to the effect that: '• these apparitions have all the characteris- tics of truth, and that the faithful are justified in believing them to be true. We humbly submit our 49 Louxdas Love decision to the judgment of the Sovereign Pontiff who governs the Universal Church." No official decision in the matter has been rendered by papal authority, but the three popes Pius IX., Leo XIII., and Pius X. are known to have expressed their per- sonal belief in the reality of the apparitions and sub- sequent miracles. Official approbation has, how- ever, been secured to the extent of allowing, the liturgical office of Our Lady of Lourdes to be in- serted in the breviary for certain localities, while churches bearing that name have been erected in many parts of the world. Lourdes soon became a rendezvous for pilgrims from all parts of the world, and in 1872 the national pilgrimages, viz., from the different provinces of France, were begun. These take place every year about Aug. 15, and on such occasions the town often receives at once as many as 60,000 pilgrims. The beautiful basilica which stands above the grotto was consecrated in 1876, and the Church of the Holy Rosary which stands on a lower level directly beneath the basilica was finished in 1901. [Before these churches is a park, the broad space in the middle of which is the scene of the procession of the Blessed Sacrament which takes place daily. The sick in all stages of disease are lined up on the edge of this space and so are passed by the consecrated Host and the attendant clergy and pil- grims, and then it is that miraculous ciu-es are alleged to be performed.] James F. Dribcoll. Biblioorapht: For a description of Lourdes consult: G. Mares, Lourdet et ses environa^ Bordeaux, 1804. For the phenomena from a sympathetic standpoint: G. Bertrin, Histoire critiqt*e dea SvinemerUa de Lourdet. AppariHona H Quiruaona, Lourdes, 1905, Eng. transl., Lourdea; A Hiat. </ ita AppetrUiona and Curea, New York, 1006; H. LaaMrre, Lea Epiaodea miraeuleiix da Lourdea, Paris, 1886, Eng. transl., Miraculoua Epiaodea of Lourdea, London, 1884; R. F. Qarke, Lourdea, and ita Miraclea, London, 1880. The critical or antagonistic point of view is set forth in E. £. C. A. Zola. Lourdea, Paris, 1884, Eog. transl., same title, Lon- don, 1804; Dozous, La OroUe de Lourdea, Paris, 1874; Justinus, Lourdea in het licht der nieuu}ere wetenacKap, 's Hertogenbosch, 1806; J. B. Elstrade, Lea Apparitiona de Lourdea, Lourdes, 1908.
LOVE LOVE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOVE: That disinterested and unselfish relation between persons, in which the personality of the one is lost in the other, in which each esteems the other better than himself (Phil. ii. 3). It is not only one of the most comprehensive of Biblical- Christian conceptions, having basal significance for dogmatics and ethics, but it also occupies a prom- inent place in the philosophy and literature of all peoples and times. When John says, " God is love " (I John iv. 16), he does not mean to give a metaphysical definition of the essence of God, but to state God's feelings toward us. At the same time, the words open a profitable field of speculation in regard to the part love holds in the divine constitution. Augustine first, Richard of St. Victor next, and, after him, others, have endeavored to reconstruct the Trinity by the principle of love. Thus, the Father loves the Son, and the Son loves the Father (redamando) ; both loves are united in love for an object of com- mon affection (condilectio) , that is, in the Holy Spirit. But the attempt has been unsuccessful; for the Holy Spirit is a factor, not merely a prod- uct, of the divine love; and, besides, in the pro- VII.-4 posed scheme, the persons of the Godhead are not sufficiently distinguished. Yet it is undoubtedly true that love is a large element of the divine es- sence; and later theologians, as, for instance, Dor- ner, in discussing the problem of the Trinity, give it much space. Love is a basal principle in creation, in redemp- tion, and in Christian ethics. God created the world in order that he might have a field for the exercise of his love; not that the world was neces- sary in any way; but it delighted him to make the world and to fill it with creatures whom he could love; and God so loved the world that he sent his Son to die for it (John iii. 16). The Son, out of his free, divine love, laid down his life for our sal- vation (Matt. XX. 28). God was in Christ, recon- ciling the world unto himself (II Cor. v. 19); and this love of God in Christ is the only and exclusive ground of our salvation and of our sanctification (Acts iv. 12). Love is the source and center of the development of the new life in Christ. It is the chief of the Christian virtues. Our Lord set his approval upon the Mosaic summary of the law in the form of love to God and man (Matt. xxii. 37- 40; cf. Deut. vi. 5; Lev. xix. 18), and gave his fol- lowers the " new commandment," that they should love one another (John xiii. 34). Paul calls love " the fulfilling of the law " (Rom. xiii. 10), and " the end of the commandment " (I Tim. i. 6); Peter exhorts to love as the fruit of holy living (I Pet. i. 22; II Pet. i. 7); John is particularly full upon love (I John ii. 5, iv. 7, 8), and James calls love of our neighbors "the royal law" (Jas. ii. 5, 8). Love manifests itself in the two great directions, toward God and toward our neighbor, or in the contemplative and in the practical form; the former seen in Mary of Bethany, the latter in her sister Martha (Luke x. 38-42). Our Lord gave his preference to the former. It shows itself in prayer, meditation, worship, and in the conmiunion. The practical form manifests itself in all works of be- nevolence and beneficence, far and near. It is incum- bent upon the Christian to unite the two. The hardest burden our Lord lays upon his disciples is to love their enemies (Matt. v. 44). Among hu- man relationships controlled by love, marriage occupies the first place (Eph. v. 22-33). It is noteworthy that the apostle who drew such a dose parallel between conjugal love and the " great mys- tery " of Christ's love for the Church should treat married life so realistically (I Cor. vii.). True love can exist only between rational beings. To speak of love for animals, or of love for a thing, is to use improper language. Self-love is also an inaccurate but indispensable term. What passes for love in literature and on the stage is too commonly mere sexual longing. Love for gold (I Tim. vi. 10) and love for the world (I John ii. 15) are perversions of love, to its destruction. Kjlkl Burgbb f* LOVE, FAMILY OF. See Familists. LOVE FEAST. See Agape.
LOVE, CHRISTOPHER LOVE, CHRISTOPHER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOVE, CHRISTOPHER: Presbyterian; b. at Car- diff, in Glamorganshire, 1618; educated at New Inn Hall, Oxford, 1635. After taking the master's Ziova Itowth 60 degree he was obliged to leave Oxford for refusing to subscribe Archbishop Laud's canons. He went to London, and became domestic chaplain to the sheriff, and took a bold stand against the errors of the Book of Common Prayer and the religious tyranny of the times. He was cast into prison on account of an aggressive sermon at Newcastle, and in various ways persecuted in London. At the out- break of the Civil War he was made preacher to the garrison of Windsor Castle, where he gave great offense to the prelatical party by his pointed ut- terances. He was one of the first to receive pres- byterial ordination under the new organization in Jan. 23, 1644, at Aldermanbury, London; and be- came pastor of St. Jjaurence Jewry in London, where he was highly esteemed for the eloquence and vigor of his preaching. He was a strong Pres- b3rterian, the leader of the younger men of that party. In this way he became involved in a trea- sonable correspondence with the Presbyterians of Scotland to restore Charles II.; and, with many others, was arrested May 7, 1651, and chosen to make an example of, to check the Presb3rterian agi- tation against Cromwell and in favor of Charles II. He was condenmed and beheaded on Tower Hill, Aug. 22, 1651. This excited the indignation and wrath of the entire Presbyterian party, which had petitioned, by ministerial bodies and parishes, in vain for his pardon. He went to his death as their hero and martyr. His funeral sermon was preached by Thomas Manton to an immense sympathizing audience. His sermons were published, after his death, under the auspices of the leading Presby- terians of London. The most important of his works are: Grace, the TnUh and Growth, and differ- etU Degrees thereof (22^ pp., London, 1652); Heaven's Glory, HeWs Terror (350 pp., 1663); Combate between the Fleeh and the Spirit (292 pp., 1654); Treatise of Effectual CaUing (218 pp., 1658); The Natural Man's Case Stated (8vo, 280 pp., 1658); Select Works (8vo, Glasgow, 1806-07, 2 vols.). C. A. Briggs. Bibliography: D. Neal. Hiat. of the Puritans, ed. J. Toul- min. 6 vols., Bath, 1703-97; W. Wilson, Hiat. and An^ Oquitiea of ^ DiaaerUino Churehea in London, i. 332, iii. 330, 4 vols., London, 1808-14; Mamoira of iha LAfe of Am- broae Bamea, ed. W. H. D. Longstaffe for the Surtees So- ciety, no. 50, Durham, 1867; W. A. Shaw. HiaL of the Enoliah Church . . . 1640-1660, ii. 140, 321, 404, London, 1900; DNB, xxxiv. 165-167.
LOVE, WILLIAM DE LOSS LOVE, WILLIAM DE LOSS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOVE, WILLIAM DE LOSS: Congregationalist; b. at New Haven, Conn., Nov. 29, 1851. He was graduated from Hamilton College (A.B., 1873), and Andover Theological Seminary (1878); was instructor in mathematics and natural science in the Military Academy at Leicester, Mass., in 1873- 1874, and principal of the Broadway Grammar School, Norwich, Conn., in 1874-75. After being pastor of the Evangelical Congregational Church, Lancaster, Mass., from 1878 to 1881, he traveled and engaged in commercial pursuits until 1885, be- sides acting as supply for the Second Congrega- tional Church, Keene, N. H., for a year. Since 1885 he has been pastor of the Farmington Avenue Church, Hartford, Conn. He has written The Fast and Thanksgiving Days of New England (Boston, 1895) and Samson Occam and the Christian Indians qfNew England (1900).
LOWDER, CHARLES FUGE LOWDER, CHARLES FUGE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOWDER, CHARLES FUGE: London mission preacher; b. at Bath June 22, 1820; d. at Zell-am- See <40 m. s.s.w. of Salzburg), Austria, Sept. 9, 1880. He studied at King's College School, Lon- don, and at Exeter College, Oxford (B.A., 1843; M.A., 1845), and took orders in 1843. He was curate at Walton, near Glastonbury, 1843-44, chap- lain of the Axbridge workhouse 1844-45, curate of Tetbury, Gloucestershire, 1845-51, then curate at St. Barnabas' Church, Pimlico, 1851-56. In 1856 he entered upon his life-work as head of the mis- sion at St. George's-in-the-East. The scene of his labors was in East London, among the lowest classes. Through his efforts was erected St. Peter's Church, London Docks, which was consecrated in 1866. Lowder became vicar of the new church and remained in this charge till his death. He held High- church views, was a strict ritualist, and resembled a Roman Catholic priest in his celibacy and his general mode of life. He published, besides some pamphlets. Ten Years in St. George's Mission (London, 1867); and Twenty-one Years in St. George's Mission (1877). Bibliography: Charlea Lowder, a Biography, London, 1882; DNB, xxxiv. 187.
LOWE, WILLIAM HENRY LOWE, WILLIAM HENRY

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOWE, WILLIAM HENRY : Church of England ; b. at Whaplode Drove (42 m. s.s.e. of Lincoln), Lincolnshire, Apr. 10, 1848. He was educated at Christ College, Cambridge (B.A., 1871; M.A., 1874). He was Hebrew lecturer in his college (1874-91), and chaplain there (1874-81). He was curate of Fen Ditton, Cambridgeshire (1873-75); Milton (1880-82); Willingham (1886-90); and vicar of Fen Drayton (1890-91); and since 1891 at Brisley, Norfolk. He has edited: The Psalms, with Introductions and critical Notes (in conjunction with A. C. Jennings; 2 vols., London, 1877); has written: The Hebrew Student's Commentary on Zechariah (1884); the commentaries on Zechariah and Malachi in Ellicott's Bible for English Readers (1884); and A Hebrew Grammar (1887); and trans- lated: Twelve Odes of Hafiz (Cambridge, 1877); and Muntakhab-i Tawarikh (Calcutta, 1884).
LOWER SAXON CONFEDERATION LOWER SAXON CONFEDERATION

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOWER SAXON CONFEDERATION: A federa- tion of Reformed churches in Lower Saxony which has existed for more than two centuries. It is the one church body in Germany in which the Presby- terian system was fully carried out. In Electoral Hanover, especially in the cities of Celle, Ltlneburg, Hameln, and Hanover, Huguenot fugitives had been received and had formed congregations, also in the neighboring territories of Schaumbuig-Lippe and Brunswick. On Nov. 13, 1699, it was decided at Hanover to establish a closer union between these scattered members of the Reformed Church. German Reformed bodies in Hanover, Celle, and Bdckebuig joined the confederation. The gov- ernments of Brunswick-Ltlneburg and Schaum- burg-Lippe gave permission for the establishment of the confederation, granting the union and its congregations self-government but reserving the so-called jura circa sacra. The first synod of the United Rieformed churches in Lower Saxony was held in July, 1703, at Hameln. The government 01 I«OT6 Itowth of Hanover expressly stipulated that the state commissary, who was to be present at every synod, have a seat, but not a vote. There were at first five French and three German congregations of the confederation. In 1708 a German-Dutch and a Huguenot congregation in Brunswick joined the confederation; in 1711 the German Reformed con- gregation of MUnden (Hanover) was included, fol- lowed, in 1753, by the Reformed in Gdttingen, and finaUy, in 1890, by the congregation of Altona. On account of the removal of Huguenots to the laige cities, their congregations dwindled and were finally united with the local German congregations. The first to sufifer this fate was the congregation at Backebuig (1755), followed by those of CeUe (1805), Brunswick (1811), and Hanover (1812), while the congregation of Hameln was dissolved altogether. Since 1812 the confederation has consisted of the congregations of Brunswick, BUckeburg, Celle, Hanover, Gdttingen, and Milnden, with Altona since 1890. In 1824 the congregations of the king- dom of Hanover were recognized as possessing equal rights with the Lutheran churches, and as having the rank of state churches. In 1839 a new agenda for all congregations of the federation was adopted which guards the independence of the individual congregations but vests the ultimate authority in matters affecting church discipline and doctrine in a synod of the whole confederation. The State adheres to the right of its territorial power; and the resolutions of the synod must be confirmed by the State. The election of a minister formerly re- quired the consent of the government, and the gen- eral state laws in Prussia still require that it be oonmiimicated to the provincial president, who may veto the election within thirty days. In sen- tences of synods in matters of discipline the right of an appeal de abusu to the government is recog- nized. The presbyteries and synods have remark- ably advanced the life of the Church and of the educational institutions as well as the material resources of the communities. From the first the confederation provided for the surviving members of the families of their pastors, and at a later time also of their teachers. The widows' fund, founded in 1706, has a capital that would amount to 60,000 marks for each congregation. The confederation has sought to live in peace with its Lutheran neighbors. In the agenda of 1711 the synod adopted the resolu- tion of the Conference of Charenton (1631), according to which Lutherans are permitted to take part in the worship of the Reformed Church without sacrificing their own confession. (F. H. Branoes.) Bibliography: T. Hoguea, Die Konfdderation der reformier" ten Kirehen in Niederaadiaen, Celle. 1873; the publica- tions of the Gerxnao Hugenotten-Verein, particularly the OemAidUabldtter, Magdeburg, 1891 sqq.. in which the eontributions of Drs. F. Albreoht, F. H. Brandes, H. ToUin and H. Villaret are eapecially pertinent.
LOWRIE, WALTER LOWRIE, WALTER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOWRIE, WALTER: Statesman and mission- ary secretary; b. near Edinburgh, Scotland, Dec. 10, 1784; d. in New York City Dec. 14, 1868. He was brought to America when eight years of age; studied for the ministry with marked zeal and swift progress, but, being prevented from finishing his studies, went into politics, and in 1811 was chosen to the senate of the State of Pennsylvania; after seven years' service there he was United States senator, Dec. 6, 1819-Mar. 3, 1825. At the ex- piration of his term he was made secretary of the senate of the United States, serving till 1836 when he became secretary of the missionary society of the synod of Pittsburg, which became, the year following, the Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyterian Church. He was corresponding sec- retary of this organization until his retirement in 1868, shortly before his death, and to his faithful service much of the great success attained by the board must be attributed.
LOWRY, ROBERT LOWRY, ROBERT

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOWRY, ROBERT: American Baptist; b. in Philadelphia Mar. 12, 1826; d. at Plainfield, N. J., Nov. 23, 1899. He was graduated at Lewisbiug University (1854). He was pastor at West Ches- ter, Penn. (1854-58); in New York (1858-61); in Brooklyn (1861-69); at Lewisburg, Penn. (1869- 1875); and at Plainfield, N. J. (1876-85). He was professor of belles-lettres in Lewisburg University (1869-75). He was the editor of several popular hymnals, and also wrote a number of hynms, the best-known of which are " Shall we gather at the river," " One more day's work for Jesus," and " Where is my wandering boy to-night? " Bibliography: S. W. Duffield, Enoliah Hymna, p. 479, New York, 1886; Julian, Hymnotogy, pp. 090-700.
LOWTH, WH.LIAM LOWTH, WILLIAM

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LOWTH, WILLIAM: English theologian; b. at London Sept. 3, 1660; d. at Buriton (17 m. e.s.e. of Winchester), Hampshire, May 17, 1732. He was educated at the Merchant Taylors' School, London, and at St. John's College, Oxford (B.A. 1679; M.A., 1683; B.D. and D.D., 1688), where he became a fellow. With his Vindication of the Di- vine Authority and Inspiration of the , . , Old and New Testament (London, 1692), an answer to Le Clerc, he attracted the attention of Peter Mew, bishop of Winchester, who made him his chap- lain, gave him a prebend in Winchester Cathedral in 1696, and presented him to the living of Buriton and Petersfield, Hampshire, in 1699. While less eminent than his son, Robert Lowth, he was prob- ably the profounder scholar of the two. Many scholars were indebted to him for valuable assist- ance. In addition to the work mentioned he pub- lished Directions for the Profitable Reading of the Holy Scriptures (London, 1708), a little work that has gone through many editions; and a now super- seded commentary on the prophets (1714-26), which has been frequently reprinted as a continua- tion of Bishop Patrick's commentary. Bibliography: S. A. Allibone, Critical Dictionary of Eno* lieh Literature, p. 1141, PhUadelphia, 1891; DNB, xxxiv. 216-217.
LUARD, HENRY RICHARDS LUARD, HENRY RICHARDS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUARD, HENRY RICHARDS: Church of Eng- land; b. in London Aug. 17, 1825; d. at Cam- bridge May 1, 1891. He was educated at King's College, London, and at Trinity College, Cam- bridge (B.A., 1847; M.A., 1850; B.D., 1875; D.D., 1878). He became fellow of Trinity College (1849) and was assistant tutor in mathematics there (1855- 1865); junior bursar (1853-61); and registrary of the University of Cambridge (1882-91), He waa ordained deacon and priest (1355) and was vicar of Great St. Mary'a, Cambridge (18fiO-87). He wrote: On the Belationt b^ween England and Home during Ike Earlier Portum of the Reign of Henry lit. (Cambridge, 1877); and edited the Diary of E. Rud (1851); the Canetpondence of Richard Porion (1851); Iavm of Edward the Confejuor (1858); Bartholommi de CaOon Hialoria Anglicana (1869); Robtrii GroueteMe Epiatola (1861); Annalei mo- noMlici (1864-69); Matthai Paritienais Chronica majora (1872); and Floret hieloriarum (1890); ho also prepared a Caialogue of the MamueripU Pre^- terved in the Library of the Univereily of CaitibTidge (1856); and Graduati Cantabrigienaet (1834). BtBLUxuuraT: DNB. intiv. 225-228.
AHS LUCIFER OF CALARIS AND THE LUCIFERIANS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUCIFER OF CALARIS AND THE LUCIFERIANS: Bishop of Calaris (the modern Cagliari) in Sardinia, and his followers. The dates of Luci- fer are uncertain; he died perhaps 371. He first appears in history as the envoy of Pope Liberius (q.v.) to the Emperor Constantius to urge the call- ing of a new synod. At the Synod of Milan, 355, he stood with the opposition, held firm with a few others, and, like these, was exiled. For a while he thcD lived at Gennanicia in Commagene; next, at Eleutheropolis in Palestine, and afterward in the Thebaid. During his esile, he wrote some vehe- ment polemics (ed. Hartel, in CSEL, vol. liv., Vienna, 1886) against Emperor Constantius, as a patron of heretics and the enemy of the true faith. These writings may, with some degree of probabil- ity, be arranged in the following order; De non amveniendo cum karetUis, de regibus apoaiaiids, de Athanoiio 1 and //., all prior to the autumn of 358; De non parcendo in Dcum ddinqueTttihua, after June, 359; Moriendum esse pro Dei Fiiio, 360 at the earliest, perhaps not until 361. Copious Biblical quotations give these documents no little value as bearing on the text of the Bible before Jerome and on the history of the canon. But, in other aspects. they are diffuse and repetitious, void of literary originality, and omit giving credit to authors from whom citations are mode. Vet Lucifer's writings afford a vivid picture of the narrow yet honest zeal of a man loyal to his convictions. The death of Constantius and the advent of Julian ended Lucifer's exile. In 36'2 he was at Antioch, trying unsuccessfully to settle the state of confiuion there (see Mblbtius op Antioch). He combated with especial severity the lenient treatment of ecclesiastics who had become com- promised by their defection from the right faith under Constantius, and insisted that they be stripped of their ecclesiastical offices. When at Naples, he refused church fellowship to Bishop Zosi- mus. He retired, eventuaUy, and in sullen temper, to Calaria; where he lived revered, indeed, for his confessional constancy and his austere conversa- tion, but in separation from a Church that he be- lieved to be stained by indutgenoe of heretical doc- trine. He was ever afterward the " Holy Sardin- ian"; and in 1623 his renrmins were deposited in the cathedral of Cagliari. After his death Sardinia continued the center of the Luciferian coterie, a sect peraistently entan- gling itself in the thought that the Church had be- come a harlot. The Luciferians were not confined to Sardinia, however. In Spain tliey reverenced Bishop Gregory of Elvira (q.v.); at Treves, their ideas were advocated by the Presbyter Bonosus; in Rome itself there waa a Luciferian party (not to be confused with the followers of Ursinus, q.v.), agaiuat which Jerome wrote his Allercaiio Luci- /eriani et orlhodoxx {MPL, niii. 153-182); and Hilarius. the Roman deacon (q.v.), was a Luci- ferian. Ephesius, on a journey to the East (382 or 3S3), fell in with some Luciferians at Oxyrhyn- cbos (HeptanomoB, £^ypt), who had for their bishop a monk Heradidas, titular of Eleutheropolis (Pales- tine). And at Eleutheropolis were the two pres- b3^rs, Faustinua and Marcellinus, charged with holding assemblies for divine worship in the houses of their associates and opposed by the resident bishop. They complained against the bishop, and not in vain, to the Emperor Theodosius (see Faohtinds], since a rescript of 384 forbade the persecution of those who stood in ecclesiastical fellowship with the Spaniard Gregory, and the oriental Hersclidaa. By the irony ot history, this imperial edict is the last intelligence concerning the Luciferians. G. KhCoeh. 57 Luoidus Luokook und daa Sdiitma tUr Lueiftrianer, Leipaie, 1886; W. von Hartel, in ArAiv fdr lateiniaekt Lextkographie und Oram- maiik, iu (1886). 1-68; L. Saltet. in BulUHn de litUratur€ eeeUaiaUique, 1906, pp. 300-326 (claims for the Luciferians a great literary activity); and P. Lejay, U Heritage de Cfrtgoirtd'Elvirt, in Revue BinSdictine, xxv (1008). 435-457. Consult further: DCB. iii. 749-751; Ceil]MT,Auieur9»aeria, iv. 239-271; Hamaek, Dogma, vols, iv.-v. passim; Neander, CkrigHan Churdi, ii. 256-257. 441-442. 45&-458. 559.
LUCKOCK, HERBERT MORTIMER LUCKOCK, HERBERT MORTIMER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUCKOCK, HERBERT MORTIMER: Church of England; b. at Great Barr (9 m. s.s.w. of Litch- field), Staffordshire, July 11, 1833. He was edu- cated at Jesus College, Cambridge (B.A., 1858; M.A., 1862), and was ordered deacon in 1860 and ordained priest two years later. He was vicar of All Saints', Cambridge, in 1862-63 and 1865-75, rector of Gayhurst and Stoke-Goldington in 186^- 1865, and canon of Ely (of which he had been hon- orary canon in 1874-75) in 1875-92, besides being principal of Ely Theological College in 1876-87. Since 1892 he has been dean of Lichfield. He was also select preacher at Cambridge in 1865, 1874-75, 1883-84, 1892, and 1901, examining chaplain to the bishop of Ely in 1873-87, and proctor for the dean and chapter of Ely in 1892. Theologically he be- longs to the Anglo-Catholic school, and has written: Tables of Stone (sermons; London, 1867); After Death, the State of the Faithful Dead and their Re- lationship to the Living (1879); Studies in the Hib- tory of the Prayer Book (1881); An Appeal to the Church not to withdraw her Clergy from the Univer- sities (1882) ; Footprints of the Son of Man as traced by St, Mark (1884); The Bishops in the Tower, a Record of Stirring Events affecting the Church and Nonconformists from the Reformation to the Revolu- tion (1886); The Intermediate State between Death and Judgment (1890); The Divine Liturgy , being The Order for Holy Communion, historically^ doc- trinaUy, and devotionaUy set forth (1889); John Wesley's Churchmanship (1891); Who are Wesley's Heirs f (1892); History of the Church in Scotland (1893); History of Marriage, Jewiih and Chri^tianf with trpecial Rejerenec to tto Indiuotubility and cer- tain /orbidden Degreti (1S04); Footprinlt of the ApoMa a* traced by St. Luke in the Act* (2 voU., 1897); Four QwUificationt for a Good Preacher (1897); The Charaderiatict of Oim Four GoipeU (1900); Btautifid Life of an Ideal Prieal; or, Rem- iniaceneta <^ Tharmia ThtUutan Carter (1902); Life and Wark$ of Dr. Johnaon (1902); Spirilmd Diffi- cidtiet in the Bible and Prayer Book : Hdjm to their Solution (1905); and Buchariatic Sacrifice and Inter- cession for the Departed (1907). He has also edited Bishop J. R. Woodford's Oreal Commiaaicn: Ttoelve Addreuea on the Ordinal (London, 1886) and Ser- mim<(2voU., 1887).
LUDLOW, JAHES MEEKER LUDLOW, JAMES MEEKER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUDLOW, JAMES MEEKER: Presbyterian; b. at Elizabeth, N. J., Mar. 15, 1841. He was edu- cated at Princeton (B.A., 1861), and Princeton Theological Seminary (1864). He was then pastor of the First Presbyterian Church, Albany, N. Y. (1864-68), Collegiate Reformed Dutch Church, New York City (1868-77), Westminster Presby- terian Church, Brooklyn, N. Y. (1877-85), and of Munn Avenue Presbyterian Church, East Orange, N. J. (1886-1909). He has written; My Saint John (New York, 1883); Concentric ChaH of History (1885); Captain of the Janizariea (1886); A King of Tyre (1891); Thai Angelic Woman (1893); Hiatary of the CruMrfM (1896); Baritone'* Pariah {\%V7): Deborah (1901]; incentivee for Life {,\m3,)\ Sir Raoul {IWih) ; Jetae hen David (1907) ; and Judge Weal'a Opinion, Reported by a Neighbor (1908).
LUEBBCK LUEBECK

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUEBECK: One of the three city-states of the German Empire, comprising the inner city, with suburbs, and several enclaves in the surrounding country; area t IS square miles; population (1906) 108367, of whom 101 ,724 were Evangehcal Luther- uu, 760 Reformed, 2,457 Roman Catholics, 638 Jews, and 231 sectarians (Baptists, Irvingites, Ad- ventists, Mormons, etc.). The Reformation was established in Lubeck by Bugenhagen in 1531, and since that time the city has been Lutheran, Rigor- ous measures were taken against the Roman Cath- olics, and against adherents of the Reformed faith, though the former continued to hold religious ser- vices, and in 1693 the latter received permission to build a church and, under certain restrictions, hold their own service. Admission to the council was denied to all non-Lutherans till the beginning of the nineteenth century. The senate issued n^ulaiions for the Reformed parish in 1825, and for the Roman Catholics in 1841; and both denominations received full political and civil rights under the constitution of 1848 (revised 1851 and 1875). At present there are fourteen Lutheran parishes and fifteen churches. The present " Constitution of the Evangelical Lu- theran Church in the Slate of Lubeck " went into effect in 1895. It vests the church government in the senate, which either exercises its authority di- rectly through its Lutheran members, or delegates it to the ecclesiastical council, which is composed of two Lutheran senators, of whom one is chairman, tbe senior (chaimiun) of tlie clerical ministerium, and tour other members, viz.. a clergyman and three laymen, who are elected by the senate for a period of six years, the clergyman on the recommendation of the clerical ministerium, the laymen on the rec- ommendation of tbe synod. In matters affecting ecclesiastical law, church taxes, the liturgy, and the boundaries of parishes, the acts of the ecclesiastical twuncil have to be sanctioned by the synod and confirmed by the senate. The clerical ministerium includes all the clergy who have charges. This body has a word in all matters affecting the doctrine and formularies of the Church. Since 1902, in m- cordance with an agreement with the consistory of Schleswick-Holstein, candidates have been examined by the board of examiners in Kiel, those passing becoming eligible for appointment in Ldbeck, as well as in Schleswick-Holstein, The synod consists of forty-seven members, of whom three are appointed by the ecclesiasical council, the remainder being members of the local parochial boards. Such a board is composed of the local clergy and a number of laymen, who are elected for six years. Each parish is divided into as many pastoral districts as it has clergy, The finances of the Church are regu- lated by a law of Jan. 18, 1S95. The basis of tbe general church treasury is a fund of 150,C)00 marks formed by the surplus of the cloister of St. John, tbe Hospital of the Holy Ghost, and the Burg Cloister. The interest on this sum is supplemented by a yearly income of 16,0(K> marks from the cloister of St. John, and by a church tax. Church attendance on the part of adults is not good, and tbe number of com- municants, which seems to be on the decrease, is less than sixteen per cent, of the population. Attend- ance by children is better. Tlicre are now services for children in every Lutheran parish of tbe city and suburbs. The oldest is that in the Church of St. James, which was established in 1875. The total attendance averages about 2,000. (L. F. Rankb,) LandMkird^en, 1880; W. Deias. 0e9ehiehie dmr tvangUiatk^tformierten Oetneind§ in LObede, Ltibeck, 1866; E. niicens, (htehidiU der liibeekiMhan Kirdu 1630- 1896, Pftderbom. 1896; 8. Carlebaoh, QtathidiU dm- Juden inLQUek, LObeok, 1899.
LUEBECK, BISHOPRIC OF LUEBECK, BISHOPRIC OF

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUEBECK, BISHOPRIC OF: An ancient episcopal see of northern Germany, established originally at Oldenburg by Otto I., probably in 968, and subject to the metropolitan jurisdiction of Hamburg. The first bishop, Egward, was con- secrated by Archbishop Adaldag. His diocese in- cluded the whole of the Wendish territory, which was under Hamburg, or from the bay of Kiel south- east to near the southern boundary of the present Mecklenburg. The Wendish risings of 990 and 1018 destroyed the work here, and when it was re- vived by Archbishop Adalbert the diocese was re- stricted to eastern Holstein. It was not till the time of Vicelin (q.v.) that the work was established on a permanent basis, and in 1158 the see was transferred to Ltlbeck by his successor Gerold (1155-63). The bishopric never attained great importance, being overshadowed by the growing power of the city. (A. Hauck.) The bishopric was made inomediately subject to the empire under Conrad II. of Querfurt (1183-86). It had secular jurisdiction over a considerable ter- ritory; but the episcopal residence was usually at Eutin. The Reformation was first introduced under the influence of King Frederick I. of Den- mark in 1524, and definitely established in 1530. It was not yet, however, possible to suppress or wholly to secularize the bishopric, so for a time bishops of Lutheran sympathies were elected. From 1586 the dignity was usually an appanage of the younger sons of the dukes of Holstein until 1706; and by the settlement of 1803 it was constituted a secular principality in favor of Peter Frederick William of Oldenburg and his heirs. Bibliography: SouroeB are Urkundenbueh de$ Bittunu LQUck, ed. W. Leverkua, Oldenburg. 1856; Adam, Onta Hammenbvrif9nai§ eeduim, ed. J. M. Lappenberg, in MOH, SeripL, vi (1846). 267-389; Helmold. Chronica Slavortun, ed. idem* ib. xzi (1869). 1-99; Arnold. Chronica Slavontm, ed. idem, ib. pp. 100-250; Annalu LubicenteB, ed. idem, ib. xvi (1859), 411-429; Seriei epiacoporum . . . LubieenHumt ib. xiii (1881), 347. Consult: Hauck. KD, vols, iii.-ir.; E. A. T. lAkspeyreB^DiaBekehrunoNord- AUnnoienB, Halle, 1864; G. Dehio, 0e9diicfUe de* Erzbia' tuma Hamburo-Bremen, 2 vols., Bisrlin, 1876; C. Eubel, Hurarekiaealholica madii avi, 2 vols., MOnster, 1898-1901.
LUKE OF PRAGUE LUKE OF PRAGUE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUKE OF PRAGUE: Bohemian bishop; b. probably at Prague about 1460; d. at Jungbunz- lau (30 m. n.e. of Prague) Dec. 11, 1528. He studied at the University of Prague (B.A. about 1480). In 1480 he joined the Moravian Brethren (see Bohemian Brethren, II.) and soon became one of their leaders. In 1491 the Brethren sent him to the East to discover if there were not some body of Christians there with whom the Brethren might make an alliance. In 1497 he was sent on a similar errand to the Waldensians and he also had dealings with Luther (q.v.), which, however, came to naught. In 1500 he was elected bishop of the Brethren. He was a voluminous writer in the departments of apologetics, hymnology, exe- gesis, and catechetics, more than eighty different works being ascribed to him. Bibliography: Consult the literature under Bohemian Brethren.
LULLUS OF MAINZ LULLUS OF MAINZ

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LULLUS OF MAINZ: German ecclesiastic; b. in England about 705; d. at the monastery of Hersfeld (32 m. s.e. of Cassel) Oct. 16, 786. The son of well-to-do people in England, he was edu- cated at the monastery of Malmesbury and subse- quently at Nhutscelle [a monastery in Southamp- tonshire] while Boniface was teaching there. After a pilgrimage to Rome he followed Boniface to Ger- many, where he was consecrated deacon about 745. His relations with Boniface were very intimate, and the latter employed him repeatedly on important missions. In his old age Boniface made Lullus his associate and consecrated him bishop (752), to be- come at his death his successor at Mainz, although the dignity of archbishop was not conferred till later. Lullus was a stanch defender of the rights of the episcopate and endeavored to maintain epis- copal supervision over monasteries and convents. In this way he became implicated in a controversy with Sturm, also a disciple of Boniface, abbot of Fulda, who maintained the independence of the monasteries. Thus the two great tendencies, the episcopal and the monastic, which were united in Boniface, were segregated in his disciples. Lullus assumed the control of the monastery of Fulda, and it was probably owing to his influence that Sturm was Imnished in 763 by King Pippin. Two years later Sturm was pardoned and in 767 as- sumed again the direction of the monastery. There- upon Lullus founded in 768 or 769 his own monas- tery of Hersfeld which developed into a rival to Fulda. Sturm died in 779. Probably in the same year Lullus was made archbishop in connection with the renewal of the metropolitan constitution by Charlemagne. His influence as archbishop can not be compared with that of Boniface, and his re- lations with Charlemagne were not always peace- ful. Under Lullus Cologne severed its relations with Mainz and developed its own archbishopric. He always maintained his connection with his na- tive country, maintained strict canonical discipline and had the cozifidenoe of the higher clergy. It is VII. not improbable that Lullus founded also the mon- astery of Bleidenstadt. (A. Hauck.) Biblioorapht: The EpUtolcB of Lullus, ed. E. DOmmler, are in MOH, EpUt., iu (1891), 207 sqq., and also in P. Jaff^, BRO, vol. iii. The Vita by Lambert of Hersfeld, ed. Holder-Egger with preface, is in MOH, Script., xv. 1 (1887), 132-148 (contains only chaps, i.-xxii., the other five chapters are in the Opera of Lambert issued by the same editor, pp. 307-340, Hanover, 1894). Consult: ASM, iii. 2, pp. 392-401; C. Will, Regeeten turOeechiehte der Maimer Erzbiechfife, i., pp. xiv., xv., 34-45, Innsbruck, 1877; F. Falk, in Der Katholik, ii (1879), 662-667; A. Gdpfert, Lullus der Nachfolger dee Bonifadus im Maimer Ertbiathum, Leipsio, 1881; H. Hahn, Bonifaz und Lul, ib. 1883; Holder-Egger, in NA, ix. 285-320, xix, 609; Hauck, KD, vols. i.-ii.; Rettberg, KD, I 673 sqq.
LUND, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF LUND, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUND, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF: A former metro- politan see in Denmark (now in Sweden), founded about the middle of the eleventh century, and raised to metropolitan dignity probably in 1103-04, replacing the former jurisdiction of the archbishops of Hamburg-Bremen. This transfer was not reo- ognized by Innocent II. and was long contested by the Germans; it was confirmed, however, by Ad- rian IV., with the addition of the title of primate of Denmark and Sweden. The last Roman Cath- olic archbishop was imprisoned in 1536, to be re- leased only on condition of withdrawing his op- position to the change of religion, and in 1537 the first Lutheran bishop took possession of the see. In 1660 it was transferred to Copenhagen. Bibliography: The occupants of the see are named, with their terms of office, in Gams, Seriee epiecoporum, p. .330. Consult further: Acta pontiflcum Danica . . . 1S16-1636, Copenhagen, 1904; KL, viii. 29&-300.
LUTHER'S TWO CATECHISMS LUTHER'S TWO CATECHISMS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUTHER'S TWO CATECHISMS: Even while a Roman Catholic priest, Luther had repeatedly treated in his sermons the main divisions of the catechism. Some of the sermons which he preached on the Commandments and the Lord's Prayer in 1516 and 1517 have been preserved. More impoi^ tant, however, as a preparation was his work in the confessional, where he learned to know the detrimental influence of the formal lists of sins which were considered useful, and to appreciate in contrast the unparalleled excellence of the ten com- mandments, of which, as well as of the Apostles' Creed and the Lord's Prayer, he early began to write short expositions: in 1518 Kurze Auslegung der zehn Gfhote Gottes, threr ErfuUung und Uebertretung, in 1519 Kurze Unierweisung vote man beichien soil, and in the same year several ex- positions of the Lord's Prayer and one on the Apostles' Creed; then in 1520 he combined these treatises under the title Kurze Form der zehn Gehole, dea GlavbenSf des Vaterunaers. Here is found the first combined treatment of these three articles, and therefore the most important work of prepara- tion for the catechisms. In 1522 Luther edited the Betbilchlein, All these writings were intended primarily to be used in preparation for confes- sion, but he had the instruction of youth also in his mind. When, after Luther's return from the Wartburg, Evangelical principles were introduced at Witten- berg, especial attention was paid to the religious instruction of children. In the spring of 1521 Johann Agricola was appointed catechist at the principal church, and gave regular instruction in religion to the children. The custom of preaching regular sermons on the catechism began about this time. After the abolition of compulsory confes- sion Luther announced in 1523 that every person intending to partake of the Lord's Supper should give notice to the pastor and submit to an exami- nation. To facilitate the preparation for such an examination, he arranged short questions on the Lord's Supper; but soon he conceived the idea of writing a small book that should serve for the in- struction of youth, form the basis for sermons on the catechism, and make possible a more compre- hensive preparation for the Lord's Supper. The Kinderfragen of the Bohemian Brethren, with which Luther became acquainted at least as early as 1523, may have suggested the idea of such a manual. Nicolaus Hausmann, preacher at Zwickau, to whom Luther announced his intention, confirmed him in it. In a letter to Hausmann (1525) Luther states that Jonas and Agricola had been commissioned to prepare a catechism; but their work does not seem to have progressed rapidly, and when Agricola re- moved to Eisleben, Luther himself took charge of the matter. Before it was finished, there appeared in 1525 a book in Low German entitled Eyn Bdke- schen vor de leyen vnde kinder, which in the same year was translated into High German. It is not known to what extent Luther was concerned in the publication of this book, but there is no doubt that it originated under his influence, since it ap- peared at a time when he had already conceived the idea of adding the two sacraments to the orig- inal three articles discussed in his Kurze Form of 1520. In 1526 Luther seems to have already sanc- tioned its official use in the Church. As the Biich- lein fUr Laien forms the basis for the text of the catechisms, so do Luther's catechetical sermons of 1528 for their interpretation in his more compre- hensive work, called the larger catechism; for the larger catechism is nothing but an interpretation of the smaller ones on the basis of sermons which he preached in 1528 at Brunswick in the absence of Bugenhagen, and was necessitated chiefly by the ignorance of preachers revealed to him at the visi- tations of 1528 and 1529. While Luther was working in 1529 on his larger catechism, the idea of issuing a smaller catechism, as an epitome of the larger, occurred to him, and he published it before the latter in two series in the form of tables, according to a wide-spread custom of the time. The tabulcB have not been preserved, but their contents are pretty well known. The first table was in circulation as early as Jan. 20, 1529, and was a real children's catechism, including the Ten Commandments, the Creed, the Lord's Prayer, and some other prayers. The second table, which appeared in the middle of March, treated of the sac- raments of baptism and of the Lord's Supper, and was intended chiefly for adults. This distinction be- tween the catechism proper and the doctrine of the sacraments was clearly expressed by Luther in his catechetical sermons of 1528, then in the larger cate- chism, and again in 1530. Only by degrees did it disappear and the sacraments come to be considered an inseparable part of the catechism. The tabulcc were first put into book form in a Low German trans- lation (Hamburg, 1529). The larger catechism appeared in the same month of Apr., 1529, and re- tained in the main its original form in the numer- oils later editions, of which a second followed in the same year and a third in 1530. Like the iabidcB, the larger catechism was translated into Low Ger- man (1529) and in the same year twice into Latin. By May 16, 1529, Luther's own smaller catechism was published in book form, and soon went into a second edition. No copies of the original Witten- berg printings of either edition are extant, but there are three reprints, evidently independent, two made at Erfurt and one at Marburg. Accord- ing to these the title of the first editions in book form was Der kleine Catechismtia fUr die gemeine P/arherr und Prediger. Mart. Luther. Besides the material of the tabtdcB they contained a preface, morning and evening prayers, and devotional ex- ercises for the family, and a marriage service. The third edition was out by June 13, 1529, under the title Enchiridion. Der kleine Catechiemua fUr die gemeine P/arfierr und Prediger, gemehret und ge- bessert. Of the editions which appeared prior to Luther's death, those of 1531, 1535, 1536, 1537, 1539, and 1542 are known. Two Latin trans- lations (with some alterations) appeared in 1529, both at Wittenberg. One of these, Simplicissima et breviseima catechismi expoeitiOf appeared as an appendix to the Enchiridion jriarum precationum, the Latin translation of the BetbUchlein. Its au- thor is not known. The other translation. Parvus Catechismua pro pueria in achola, was made by J. Sauermann and was incorporated into the '* Book of CJoncord." A third Latin translation originated with Justus Jonas and is contained in his Latin translation of the Nuremberg Kinderpredigten of 1539. A Greek translation by Johann Mylius was printed at Basel in 1558 at the instigation of Mi- chael Neander, who republished it in 1564 together with Sauermann's translation. In 1572 J. Clajus composed his Germdn-Latin-Greek-Hebrew poly- glot. For the translations into modem languages and the position of Luther's smaller catechism in the history of catechisms, see Catechisms. The excellent points of the smaller catechism have been stated as follows: (1) The smaller cate- chism does not attempt to give a complete system of doctrine — it is not a manual of dogmatics for children; (2) it avoids carefully the scholastic language of the theologians; (3) it avoids all po- lemics; (4) it does away with the traditional di- vision of the Apostles' Creed into twelve articles, and makes it an exposition of the God of revelation as showing himself in his works and blessing the Christian life. It was soon forgotten that the larger catechism was the authoritative exposition of the smaller. In 1750 Johann Georg Walch pointed out in the introduction to his edition of the symbolical books that the catechism must be explained by Luther himself. This principle has been observed in the modem works of A. Nebe, Der kleine Katechiamus auagdegt ana LiUhera Wer- ken (Stuttgart, 1891); Th. Hardeland, Der kleine Katechismus nach Luthera Schriften auagelegt (G6t- tingen, 1889); idem., Die kaie^ieliache Behandlung des kleinen Kalechiamua Luihera in Unterredungen (Berlin, 1899). (Ferdinand Cohrs.) Bouogbapht: Besides the lives of Luther by Kdstlin, Kolde, and others, eonsult: J. C. W. Augusti, Vertttch einer hi8tori9eh4arUi9(Jien Einleiiunq in die heyden Hcntpt- KiUeehiamen der evanoeliachen Kirehe, EUberfeld, 1824; G. Veesenmeyer, Naehriehten tfon einigen evanffeli§dten catechetuehen Schriften, Ulm, 1830; K. F. T. Schneider, D. Martin LiUhera kleiner Katechiamue, Berlin. 1863; T. Hamack, Der kleine Katechiemut . . . LtUhere in aeiner Urffeatalt, Stutt«art. 1856; C. MOnckeberg, Die erele Aii§- gabe von Luthera kleinem KcUediiemua, Hamburg, 1868; E. GApfert. W6rterhuch zum kleinen Katechiamue . . . LiUhera, Leipslo, 1889; A. Elbeling, Luthera kleiner Kale- chiamua, Hanover, 1800; F. Fricke, Luthera kleiner Kate- chiamua in aeiner Einwirkung auf die kcUecheiiache lAtera- tur dea Reformationajahrhunderta, Gdttingen, 1808; F. Cohrs, Die evangeliachen Katechiamua-Verauche vor Luthera Enchiridion, Berlin, 1900; H. E. Jacobs, Martin Luther, pp. 274 sqq.. New York, 1898; Luther'a Small Catechism Devdoped and Explained^ . . . Publiahed by the General Synod . . . , Philadelphia (current).
LHZ LUZ

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LUZ: The name of two cities. (I) The early Canaanitic name for Bethel (Gen. xxviii. 19, xixv. 6; Josh. xviii. 13; but cf. Josh. xvi. 2). (2) A city founded, according to Judges i. 26, in " the land of the Hittites" by the survivors of the ancient city when it was taken by the Hebrews. The lo- cation is unknown.
THE NEW 8CHAFF-HERZ0G LYNCH, THOMAS TOKE LYNCH, THOMAS TOKE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LYNCH, THOMAS TOKE: English Independent; b. at Dunmow (32 m. n.e. of London), Essex, July £, 1818; d. in London May 9. 1871. He was edu- cated St Islington, London, and attended High- bury College for a short time. He was pastor of the Independent Church at Highgate (1847-49); of a church in Mortimer Street, which afterward moved to Grafton Slnwt (1849-52); and of one in Gower Street, afterward Mornington Church (1860- 1871). Lynch had httle success as a preacher, but as a hymn-writer be obtained great celebrity. His hymns, however, have been considered to betray too ardent a love of nature to be entirely suited to use in Christian worship. The best-known is " Gra- cious Spirit, dwell with me," He first came into prominence through the publication of The Riva- Ut: a Contribulion to Sacred Sa7\g (London, 1855), which gave rise at the time to a (ierce controversy because of the charge that it was pantheistic in tone. His chief opponents were James Grant and Dr. John Campbell; hia chief supporters. Newman Hall and Thomas Binney. Lynch was hia own best defender, writing under the nom de plume of " Silent Long." Among his other writings are Memoriah qf TheopkUus Trinal (largely autobiographical, 1850); Eggaya on some of the Formt of Lileralure (1853); Ledure* in Aid o/ Self- Improvement (1834); The Momington Lecture (1870); and Sermons Jor tny CuToten (1871). BiBLiaaBAPinr: His Mtnoirt. ed. W. WhiU. sppenred Lon- don, 1S74. knJ n snuJl CrilimJ and DiKriptite Notice 0/ . . T. T. LmA was publiahBd Lnndor, 1B74. Cod- ■ull: B. W. DuSeld, Ennlith Himnt. p. IBI , New Yark. 18HS; Juli&n. Hvmnobni/. PP. 705-706: DSB. uiiv. 338-33S.
LYON, DAVID GORDOH LYON, DAVID GORDON

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LYON, DAVID GORDON: Baptist; b. at Ben- ton, Ala., May 24, 1852. He was educated at Howard College, Marion, Ala. (A.B., 1875), South- ern Baptist Theological Seminary, Louisville, Ky. (1876-79), and the University of Leipsic (Ph.D., 1882). Since 1882 he has been Hollis professor ot divinity in Harvard University, and has also been curator of the Harvard Semitic Museum since its foundation in 1890. In 1906-07 he was director of the American School for Oriental Study and Research in Palestine. In theology he is a pro- gressive conservative. Besides a number of briefer contributions, lie has written Die KeiUchriJIterte Sargon's, KSnigs von Asayrien {JSS-TOS v. Chr.), nach den Origimden Tieu heratitgegeben, iibersctzt und erkMn (Leipaic, 1883) and An Assyrian Manual far the U»e of Beginners in the Study of the Assyrian Language (Chicago, 1886).
LYOM, MARY LYON, MARY

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LYON, MARY: American educator; b. at Buckland, Mass., Feb. 28, 1797; d. at South Had- ley, Mass., Mar. 5, 1849. She was educated at several academies, notably at Ashfield and Byfield. and later at Amherst College. She taught at the Adams Female Seminary at Londonderry, N. H. (1824-28), and at Miss Grant's school in Ipswich (1828-34). In 1834 she left teaching to raise funds for building a female academy, which was finally opened at South Hadley on Nov. 8, 1837. Of this school, called the Mount Holyoke Seminary (now College), she was principal until her death. Under her care the school was. as it still is, a nursery of missionaries and it still keeps its reputation for piety and efficiency. BiBuoanAFRT: E. Hilcbcook. Power of Chritlian Btntvo- liaa lUiatraled in Ihe Lift and Loturi 0/ JUorv Lyon, Norlhftmptc.11, 1B5I. new ed.. New York. 1S5S; F. Fiiltf. RecaUneliina nf Mary Lyan. Bonton. lB6n^ ^fm■|l Lyan. in Old South Itafittt, no, 146, ib. IWH.
LYOHS, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF LYONS, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LYONS, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF: An ancient metropolitan see in France. The town, which be- came a Roman colony in 43 B.C., acquired consid- erable importance under the Empire; in it Augus- tus spent three years; here Claudius was born; and when the town was rebuilt after a conflagration, Nero gave it precedence over all the other Roman towns of Gaul, Christianity was probably intro- duced within the first century. As at Marseilles, the earliest Christians were of Greek origin. The first bishop is supposed to have been Pothinus or Photinus, sent by Polycarp from Smyrna between 140 and 150. With many of his flock, he suffered martyrdom in 177, and was succeeded by Irenæus (q.v.). A long line of devoted bishops followed. Lupus (d. c. 542) is usually reckoned as the first archbishop, with four suffragan sees, Autun, Lan- gres, Macon, and ChAlona — to which In the middle of the eighteenth century were added the newly founded sees of Dijon and Saint-Claude. After the Revolution Châlons and Macon were euppressed, and Grenoble was taken from the province of Vienne, which metropolitan see waa then united with Lyons. After the aurrounrting territory be- came part ot the Frankiah kingdom in 632, the temporal sovereignty of Lyons was excrcified by the archbishops, and this continued practically the case while it was nominally a part of the Empire, from 1032 to 1312, Philip the Fair erected a county of Lyons, but left it attached to the archi- epiacopol eee; the secular jurisdiction waa not as- sumed by the king until 1563. in Usnii. Striti <p<>rep(»^>". PP- fiOB-672, nupplcineal. p, 38. CdiuuJi: J. Perncr. Hiil, da archrffipiM de Lvon. Loiu-]«-Saiiiii«, ISST: Cartalain da fltfi de Vtgli*t dc Li/ot. II73~IStl. Lyons, 1S93: J. B. MartiD. Obituairt dt rtglitt primaliale dt Lyon, ib. I002( idem, Canriia tl bnl- hntt du diatiK dt Luor. da crigina i . . . I3lt. ib. IDOG; M<Bl]p-oloiit de la Mainle iglite dt Li/an. Porie. 1002,
LYTE, HEBRY FRAHCIS LYTE, HENRY FRANCIS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LYTE, HENRY FRANCIS: British hymn-writer; b. at Ednam (3 m, n.n.e, of Kelso), Roxburgh- shire, Scotland, June 1, 1793; d. at Nice, France, Nov. 20, 1847. He was educated in Ireland, first at the royal school of Enniskillen, then at Trinity College, Dublin, where he was gradu- ated in 1814. He took orders in 1815, and, after holding curacies at Taghmon {near Wexford), Marzion (Cornwall), and Lymington (Hampshire), entered upon the perpetual curacy of Lower Brix- ham, Devonshire, in 1823, This appointment he held till his death, Lyte's hymns were published partly in Poena, chiefly Religious (London, 1833), and partly in The Spirit of the Psalms (1834). Many of them are in common use. His " Abide with me, fast falls the eventide " is generally re- garded as one of the few fine hymns in the lan- guage. Other well-known hymns by Lyte are, " Pleasant are Thy courts above," " Far from my heavenly home." " God of mercy, God of grace," " Praise, my soul, the King of heaven," and " Jesus, Lyttelton MoAU Mission 100 I my cross have taken." Lyte also published Tales in Verse (London, 1826), and an appreciative Memoir of Henry Vaughan, prefixed to Vaughan's Sacred Poems (London, 1847). His daughter edited his Remains (1850), which consists of poems, ser- mons, and letters. The poems in this volume were reprinted in Lyte's Miscellaneous Poems (1868). Bibliography: Besides the Memoir in the Remaint^ con- sult: J. Miller, Sinoert and Song* of the Chiwch^ pp. 431- 433. London, 1809; Julian, Hymndoffy, PP. 706-707.
TON LYTTELTON, GEORGE, FIRST BARON LYTTELTON

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

LYTTELTON, GEORGE, FIRST BARON LYTTELTON: English author and statesman; b. at Hagley (6 m. n.e. of Kidderminster), Worcester- shire, Jan. 17, 1709; d. there Aug. 22, 1773. He studied at Eton and Christ Church, Oxford, but took no degree. He entered parliament in 1735 as member for Okehampton, Devonshire, and con- tinued to represent this borough till 1756, when he was elevated to the peerage. He was lord com- missioner of the treasury 1744-54, and chancellor of the exchequer 1755-56. Though he was a good debater, he became prominent in parliament chiefly because of his influential political connection. With Lord Cobham, his uncle, William Pitt, a relation by affinity, and the Grenvilles, his first cousins, Lyttelton formed the powerful political clique known at first as the ** Cobhamites,'' then, after Lord Cobham's death, as the " Grenville Cousins." He was a liberal patron of literature and enjoyed the friendship of Pope, Thomson, Shenstone, Field- ing, and others. His principal works are, Obser- vations on the Conversion and Apostleship of St. Paul (London, 1747; new ed., 1879), which Dr. Johnson characterized as " a treatise to which in- fidelity has never been able to fabricate a special answer "; Dialogues of the Dead (1760; 4th ed., enlarged, 1765; new ed., 1889); and The History of the Life of Henry II. (4 vols., 1767; 3d ed., 6 vols., 1769-73), a work of much careful research, which has, however, been superseded. His verse, which is inferior to his prose, was chiefly included in Poems (Glasgow, 1773), and in his Poetical Works (London, 1785). His nephew, G. E. Ayscough, col- lected his Works (London, 1774; 3d. ed., 3 vols., 1776), including both verse and prose. Sir Robert Phillimore edited his Memoirs and Correspondence (2 vols., 1845). Biblioorapht: An excellent list of authorities is given at the end of the sketch in DNB, xxxiv. 360-374. and a Life is found in A. Chalmers, Worke of the Englieh Poets, vol. xiv., London, 1810. Consult also: £. 8. Creasy, Memoire of CelebreUed Etoniant, ib. 1876; and the works on the history of the times.
MAC ARTHUR, JAMES MAC ARTHUR, JAMES

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAC ARTHUR, JAMES: Church of England, bishop of Southampton; b. at Dawsholme, Dum- bartonshire, June 6, 1848. He was educated at the University of Glasgow (M.A., 1868), and after being called to the Scottish Bar in 1871 and to the Inner Temple in 1874, entered Cuddesdon Theo- logical College, where he studied in 1877-78, being ordered deacon in 1878 and ordained priest in the following year. He was successively curate of St. Mary's, Redcliff, Bristol, in 1878-80, rector of Lamplugh, Cumberland, in 1880-87, and vicar of St. Mary's, Tothill Fields, Westminster, in 1887-92 and of All Saints', South Acton, Middlesex, in 1892- 1893. He was also rural dean of Ealing in 1894- 1898, and in the latter year was consecrated bishop of Bombay, a diocese which he retained until 1903. He was acting metropolitan of India in 1902, and in the following year was translated to his present see of Southampton (suffragan to the bishop of Winchester). In addition to charges, addresses, and sermons, he has written Christianity and In- dian Nationality (London, 1903).
MACARTHUR, ROBERT STUART MACARTHUR, ROBERT STUART

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACARTHUR, ROBERT STUART: Baptist; b. at Dalesville, P. Q., July 31, 1841. He was edu- cated at the University of Rochester (A.B., 1867) and Rochester Theological Seminary. from which he was graduated in 1870. Since the latter j'ear he has been pastor of Calvary Baptist ChunA, New York City. He was for many years a correspond' eut of The Chicago StaTidard, and was long con- nected editorially with The CkTiiHan Inquirer and The Baptiit Quarterly Review. In addition to com- piling a number of hymnals, of which the most im- portant is the Calvary Selection of Hjfmtu and Spiritual Stmge (in collaboration with C. S. Robin bod; New York, 1879} and Laudet Domini (it collaboratioa with C. S. Robinson; 1889), he has written Calvary PulpU (New York, 1890); Divine Balutlradet (Chicago, 1892); Quick TnOhe in Quaint TerU (2 series, 1895-1907); The Attractive Chriit, and other Sermone (Philadelphia, 1898); Current Quettunu/or Thinking Men (1898); Bible Difficul- tiet and their AUevialive Interpretations (New York, 1899); Celestial Lamp (PhUadelphia, 1899); Old Book and Old Faith (New York, 1899); Round the World (Philadelphia, 1899); The Land and the Book (1900); The Queation» of the CerUuries (Cleveland, 1905); Advent, Chri^mae, New Year, Batter, and Other Sermons (1908) ; and The Ckritiian Reign, and Other Sermons (1909).
M'CABE, JOSEPH M'CABE, JOSEPH

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

M'CABE, JOSEPH: English ex-Franciscan; b. at Macclesfield (15 m. s.e. of Manchester), Chesh- ire, Nov. 11, 1867. He was educated at St. Francis' College, Manchester (1883-84), Holy Trinity, Killarney (1884-85), St. Anthony's, Lon- don (1885-91), and the University of Lou vain (1893-94). In 1891 he was ordained to the Ro- man Catholic priesthood and appointed professor of scholastic philosophy at St. Anthony's College, London, where he taught in 1891-93 and 1894-95. In 1895-96 he was rector of St. Bernardine's Col- lege, Buckingham, but in the latter year aban- doned the Church on account of his adoption of agnostic views, and since tliat time has been a private secretary, lecturer, journalist, and author. Besides translating E. Haeckel's Riddle of the Uni- verse (London, 1900); Wonders of Life (1904); Evolution of Man (1903); and Last Words on Evo- lution (1906); F. K. C. Biichner's Last Words on Materialism (1901); and W. Bolsche's Haeckel (1906), he has written From Home to Rationalism (London, 1896); Modern Rationalism (1897); Twelve Years in a Monastery (1897); Life in a modem Monastery (\Sm)\ Canwe Dimrmf (1899); The Re- ligion of the Twentieth Century (1899); Peter AU- Xaooalbee* XoOlnre 106 lard (1901); Saint Auguatine and hU Age (1902); HaeckeVs Critics answered (1905) ; Religion of Woman (1905); The Origin of Life (1906); Secular Ed- ucation (1906); Talleyrand (1906); The Bible in Europe; an Inquiry into the Contribution of the Chris- tian Religion to Civilisation (1907) ; Life and Letters of George Jacch Hclyoake (2 vols., 1908); and The Decay of the Church of Rome (1909).
MACCABEES, BOOKS OF MACCABEES, BOOKS OF

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACCABEES, BOOKS OF: See Apocrypha,
A, IV., 9-11. MACCABEES, FESTIVAL OF THE MACCABEES, FESTIVAL OF THE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACCABEES, FESTIVAL OF THE: The celebra- tion on Aug. 1 of the martyrdom of the seven brothers and of their mother under Antiochus Epiphanes (cf. II Mace. vii.). The festival dates from the fourteenth century. BIBLIOGRAPHY: H. Wace, The Apocrypha, ii. 589 sqq., in ** Speakers Commentary/' London, 1888.
M'CDRDY, JAMES FREDERICK M'CURDY, JAMES FREDERICK

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

M'CURDY, JAMES FREDERICK: Presby- terian; b. at Chatham, New Brunswick, Feb. 18, 1847. He was educated at the University of New Brunswick (A.B., 1866), and after being principal of Restigouche County Grammar School, Dalbousie, New Brunswick, in 1867-68, entered Princeton Theological Seminary, from which he was gradu- ated in 1871 and where he studied two additional years (1871-72). He was then assistant professor of Oriental languages in the same institution from 1873 to 1882, after which he studied at the uni- versities of Göttingen and Leipsic until 1884. He was lecturer at Princeton Theological Seminary on the Stone foundation in 1885-86, and in the latter year was appointed lecturer on Oriental literature in University College, Toronto, where be was pro- moted to his present position of professor of the same subject in 1888. In addition to numerous contributions to The Jewish Encyclopedia, Hasting'H Dictionary of the Bible, and the Standard Bible Dictionary, to theological periodicals, and besides preparing the sections on the Psalms, Hosea, and Haggai for the American edition ot J. P. Lange's commentary on the Bible (New York, 1873-76) he has written: Aryo-Semitic Speech: A Study tn Lin- guistic Archmology (Andover, 1881); History, Proph- ecy, and the Monumenis (3 vols., London, IS94- 1901); and Life of D. J. Macdonndl (Toronto, 1897).
HACDOHALD, FREDERIC WILLIAM MACDONALD, FREDERIC WILLIAM

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACDONALD, FREDERIC WILLIAM: Eng- lish Methodist; b. at Leeds Feb. 25, 1842. He was educated at Owens College, Manchester (B.A., 1862), and after being a Wesleyan minister from 1862 to 1881, was professor of systematic theology in Handsworth College, Birmingham, from 1881 to 1891. From the latter year until 1905 he was sec- retary ot the Wesleyan Missionary Society, of which he has since been honorary secretary, and in 1899- 1900 was likewise president of the Wesleyan Metho- dist Conference. He was also joint editor of the London Quarterly Review from 1871 to 1875, and in 1880 represented the British Methodist Conference at the General Conference of the Methodist Episco- pal Church ot America. He has written: Life of Fletcher of Madeley (London, 1885); Life of Will- iam Mortey Punshon (1887); Latin Hymns in the Wesleyan Hymn-Book {1900); and In a Nook with a Booh (1907).
MACDDFF, JOHH ROSS MACDUFF, JOHN ROSS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACDUFF, JOHN ROSS: Church of Scotland; b. at Bonhard in the parish of Scone, Perthshire, May 23, 1818; d. at Chislehurst (10 m. s.e. of Lon- don), Kent, England, Apr. 30, 1895. He was edu- cated at the University of Edinburgh, and was Ill MoOrle Maoedonlus pastor successively of Kettins, Forfarshire (184^ 1849), of St. Madoes, Perthshire (1849-55), and of Sandyford parish, Glasgow (1855-70). In 1870 he retired to Chislehurst and devoted himself to the composition of religious literature. His publica- tions were very numerous. They are mostly small devotional manuals, characterized by a devout and practical imagination, and have been read by thou- sands in his own country and in America. Possibly of these the two most famous volumes are The Morning and Night Watches (in one vol., London, 323d thousand in 1904); and The Mind and Words of Jesus (in one vol., 341st thousand). He wrote also verse, of which he issued a collected edition, Matin and Vesper Bells (2 vols., 1898). Two of his hymns have found their way into hymn-books, " Christ is coming," and *' Everlasting Arms of love." His autobiography, Reminiscences of a Lang Life, by the AtUhor of Morning and Night Watches, appeared 1896. fixBLiooRAPHT: CoiMult, besides the Remini9centeat ut. sup, edited by his daughter, 8. W. Duffield, Enoliah Hymna, pp. 86-67, New York, 1886; Julian, Humnology, p. 708.
MACEDONIA IN THE APOSTOLIC AGE MACEDONIA IN THE APOSTOLIC AGE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACEDONIA IN THE APOSTOLIC AGE: After the battle of Pydna (168 b.c.) Macedonia passed under Roman dominion and was divided into four districts. In 146 B.C. it became a province, and under Augustus it passed to the senate; under Tiberius and Claudius it was an imperial charge and was united with Achaia; but after 44 b.c. it belonged again to the Senate. In the third and fourth centuries it was again divided into four provinces. Ptolemæus (iii. 13) thus describes its extent: " On the east the river Nestus formed the boundary toward Thracia, so that Philippi poUtic- ally belonged to Macedonia. [This agrees with Acts xvi. 9, where the ' man of Macedonia ' ap- peared to Paul asking him to come over into Mace- donia, who went by way of Samothrace directly to Neapolis-Philippi, passing around Thrace.] On the north, Macedonia bordered on Dalmatia-Illyri- cum; in the west, on the Adriatic Sea. The south- em boundary is uncertain." As in other provinces, there was also a provincial council for Macedonia which probably met in Thessalonica, which was called the '' first [city] of Macedonia." The prin- cipal cities were connected by the Via Egnatia, a fine military road, which Paul used from Neapolis to Thessalonica. From Neapolis, opposite to the island of Thasos, the road led to Philippi, a city founded by Philip of Macedonia. Octavianus planted a Roman colony there (cf. Acts xvi. 12) which was considerably enlarged after the battle at Actiimi. The population was almost entirely Roman, as the many Latin inscriptions prove. The masters of the prophesying slaves (Acts xvi. 16-21) were Romans. The officers also were Ro- mans (prætors, not politarchs). The number of Jews in Philippi seems to have been not very large, for Paul intended to stay there only a few days, and a congregation seems not to have existed at all. Acts xvi. 13 says nothing of a synagogue (as in xvii. 1), it mentions only a praying-place for women outside of the gate by the river. The next two stations on the Via Egnatia, at which Paul only touched, were Amphipolis and Apollonia. Then comes Thessalonica, formerly called Therms. According to PhiUp it was a free city, the capital of the province. In the time of Strabo it was very populous. It had its politarchs (Acts xvii. 6), though their number is uncertain, also a council {demos. Acts xvii. 5). The politarchs had police jurisdiction and were responsible to the provincial authorities for order and quiet in the city (xvii. 6 sqq). That Paul selected this important commer- cial city as a missionary field is in accord with his custom; in the Acts a further motive was the fact that a synagogue of the Jews was there. This " would mean that the Jews of the entire district, including those of Amphipolis and Apollonia, cen- tered their worship at Thessalonica " (Zahn) . Thus is explained also why the apostle passed by Amphipolis and Apollonia. The influence of the Jews in Thessa- lonica must have been very great; it was felt even at Berea, the first city to go over to the Romans after the battle of Pydna. This last was one of the most populous cities of Macedonia. (J. Weiss.) Bibuoorapht: J. Marquardt. RUmitche StaaUvencaltung, i. 316-321. Leipsic, 1881; W. M. Leake. Travela in Northr- em Greece, vol. iii.. London, 1835; T. A. Desdevisee-du- Desert. Oiooraphie ancienne de la MacSdoine, Paris, 1863; L. Heuzey, Mieeion archfoloQique de Mixcidoine, Pam. 1876; B. Niese, Oeachiehte der oriechieehen und makedoni- •cAen Staaten eeit der SchkuM bei Chaeronea, 3 parts, Gotha, 1893-1903; W. M. Ramsay. Churdi in Oie Roman Empire, pp. 149, 151. 156, 158, 160, London. 1893; idem, St Paul the Traveller and Roman dHMen, chaps. ix.-x^ ib. 1897.
MACHFELAH MACHFELAH

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACHFELAH: The name of the cave, or of the place near Hebron where the cave was situated, which Abraham bought of Ephron the Hittite for a family sepulcher. The name occurs only Gen. xxiii. 9, 17, 19, ixv. 9, xVa. 30, I. 13; and accord- ing to these passages and their context Abraham and Sarah, Isaac and Rebekah, Jacob and Leah were buried there. The place which holds what is traditionally regarded as the cave is surrounded by a wall 194 feet long and fifty-eight feet high, con- structed of huge stones, and reminding one, both in design and workmanship, of the foundation of the temple in Jerusalem. Within this enclosure is a Mohammedan mosque; and strangers, that is, non-Mohammedans, are rigidly excluded from the building. In 1862 the Prince of Wales, accom- panieci by Dean Stanley, visited Hebron; and, on special orders from Constantinople, the mosque was opened to them. In 1882 the same courtesy was extended during a visit paid by Princes Albert Victor and George of Wales, accompanied by Canon Dalton, Sir Charles Wilson, and Capt. Conder. mstbod n tha rourll K ilic. w exAct referc]i«4 ._ _ lurpes. is tounil in DB. iii. 197-202. Coaiult furtber: W. M. ThomioD. Tht Land and Iht Book, il 381-3B8. GS6. New York. 1869: A. P. Staalty. Luiurtt an Iht Hittorv x^ Uc JeiriiA CAureh. i. 53S sqq., ib. ISeS; J. FerguHinn, (/°Iv SepuIcAre and Oa Ttm-plt. LoDiiun, 1885; C. RJiIbt. Comparative OeoBraphu r>f Pala- tine, iii. 305-323, Ediaburgli. 1866: P. Schoff. Throivh Bibit Landi. pp. 212 »qq.. No* Yorlt, 1878: FEF, Afem- airt, SuTxcv i4 Waltm PoJatiat. iiL 30G, Lnadon. 1BS3.
HACEAY, ALEZAHDER MURDOCH MACKAY, ALEXANDER MURDOCH

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACKAY, ALEXANDER MURDOCH: Mission- ary to Uganda; b, at Rhymie (31 m. n.w, of Aber- deen) Oct. 13. 1849; d, at Uganda Feb, 4, 1890. He studied at the Free Church Training School for Teachers at Edinburgh, at Edinburgh University, and in BerUn. He displayed a great aptitude for mechanics, and spent several years as a draftsman in Germany. In 1875 he offered his services as a missionary to the Church Missionary Society, was accepted, reached Zanzibar on his way to his field May 30, 1876, and Uganda in Nov., 1878, There, largely through his knowledge of practical me- chanics, he enjoyed the protection of Mutesa; but when Mwonga came to the throne in 1884, Mackay's position became difficult because of the king's op- position, and there was little change when Kiwewa succeeded to the throne in 1888. Mackay still held on. however, and it is largely due to his courage, energy, and devotion that the mission in Uganda is in its present flourishing condition (see Ajbica, II., Uganda). He fell a victim to malarial fever, and succumbed after four days of illness, having spent fourteen years in Africa without once having visited his native country. BlBUOOaAPHT: Aleiander M. Madiay, Fionctr il iitiofutrii if Of Church Uunanarv Sodilu in Ugajula; bv Am Sitt^. ■WW ed.. London. ISW; Altmnder U-ukav. Miuiiynarti Utra of Uiianda. lb. 1863.
MACKAY-SMITH, ALEXASDER MACKAY-SMITH, ALEXANDER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACKAY-SMITH, ALEXANDER: Protestant Episcopal bishop- coadjutor of Pennsylvania; b. at New Haven, Conn., June 2, 1850. He was edu- cated at Trinity College, Hartford, Conn. (A.B., 1872). and received his theological training partly in the General Theological Seminary and partly in England and Germany. He was ordered deacon in 1876 and advanced to the priesthood in the fol- lowing year. After being successively curate of Grace Church, Boston (1877-80), and St. Thomas's. New York City (1880-86), he was first archdeacon of New York from 1887 to 1893, and from the lat- ter year to 1902 was rector of St. John's, Washing- ton, D. C. In 1902 he was consecrated bishop- coadjutor of Pennsylvania, after having declined the coadjutor-bishopric of Kansas.
MACKEBZIE, WILLIAM DOUGLAS MACKENZIE, WILLIAM DOUGLAS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACKENZIE, WILLIAM DOUGLAS: Congre- gationalist; b. at Fauresmith (80 m. s.e. of Kim- bcrley). Orange Free Colony, South Africa, July 16, 1859, He was educated at the University of Edin- burgh (M.A., 1881), the CongregationaJ Theolog- ical Hail, Edinburgh, and the universities of Got- tingen and Marburg (1881-82). He then entered the ministry of his denomination, and held succes- sive pastorates at Montrose, Kincardineshire (188!^- 1889), and Mornbgside, Edinburgh (1889-95). From 1895 to 1903 he was professor of systematic theology in Chicago Theological Seminary, and since 1904 has been professor of the same subject and president of Hartford Theological Seminary. He has written: The Ethics oj Gambling {London, 18S3); The Revelalion of the Chrial {IS93); Chris- lianity and the Progreit of Man (Chicago, 1897); SotUk Africa: Itn HUtory, Heroet, and War» (1900); and John Maekaaie, South African Misaianary and 5to/e*man (biography of his father; New York, 1902).
HACEIE, GEORGE MONRO MACKIE, GEORGE MONRO

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACKIE, GEORGE MONRO: Scotch Presby- terian; b. at Banchory (15 m. s.w. of Aberdeen), Kincardineshire, Oct. 27, 1853. He was educated At the University of Aberdeen and the Divinity Hall of Edinburgh University, and since 1880 has been minister of the Anglo-American congregation and missionary of the Church of Scotland Jewish Mission at Beirut, Syria. In addition to his mis- eionary and pastoral work, he has devoted himself to the study of oriental life as illustrative of the Bible, and in theology holds " that a man becomes A Christian by giving himself to Christ as a dwell- ing-place for His Spirit; that this indwelling will ehow itself in hkeness to Christ personally, and socially in kindness to all in whom the same Spirit is already dwelling or desiring to dwell; and that in the statesmanship of the Gospel, while all past and present forms of church membership and gov- ernment have rendered in their day most impor- tant service, they are quite unable to proiluce that conception of a great citizenship that is necessary for a kingdom that is destined to conquer the world for Christ." He has written Bible Manners and Ciutcrma (Edinburgh, 1898).
MACKISTOSH, CHARLES HEHRY MACKINTOSH, CHARLES HENRY

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACKINTOSH, CHARLES HENRY: Plymouth Brother; b. in County Wicklow, Ireland, in 1820; d. at Cheltenham (7 m. n.e. of Gloucester) Nov. 2, 1898. He was schoolmaster at Westport, County Mayo, Ireland, for a few years. But for the greater part of his life he devoted himself to evangelism and pastoral ministry as well as to religious jour- nalism, as editor of the monthly periodical Things New and Old; and to religious literature. He was the author of the Notes by C. H. M. on all the books of the Pentateuch, which enjoyed great popularity, being sold in enormous quantity, especially in the United States; so that the initials "C, H. M." under which they were issued were very familiar while probably the name they stood for was 117 MoKibbixi Maolay not. Mr. Gladstone commended his English style; Spurgeon, while dissenting from their " Darbyism/' commended the Notes, especially the volume on Exodus. Edward E. Whitfield.
MACKNI6HT, JAMES MACKNIGHT, JAMES

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACKNIGHT, JAMES: Scotch divine and Biblical scholar; b. at Irvine (10 m. n. of Ayr), Ayrshire, Sept. 17, 1721; d. at Edinburgh Jan. 13, 1800. He was educated at the universities of Glas- gow and Leyden; preached for a short time at Gorbals, Renfrewshire; was then assistant minis- ter at Kilwinning, Ayrshire; pastor at Maybole, 1753-69; at Jedburgh, 1769-72; and of Lady Yester's Church, Edinburgh, from 1772 till his death. His fame rests chiefly upon his Harmony of the Gospels, in which the Natural Order of each is Preserved, with a Paraphrase and Notes (2 vols., London, 1756; 7th ed., 1822; Latin transl., 3 vols., Bremen, 1772-79), a work which for over half a century remained the standard. The notes are very copious and make of the work practically a complete life of Christ so far as the knowledge of the period permitted. He also wrote: The Truth of Gospel History (1763; on the evidences for the Gospels); and A New Literal Translation from the Original Greek of all the Apostolical Epistles, with a Commentary and Notes (4 vols., 1795; subsequent editions varying in the number of volumes, those subsequent to 1806 prefaced by a Life by his son; 7th ed., 1843). The last-named work was printed both with and without the Greek text. Biblioorapht: Bendea the Ia/b by his son, ut sup., con- sult: 8. A. AUibone, Critical Dictionary of Enolish Litera- ture, ii. 1188-89. Philadelphia, 1891 (cites several varying opinions of Macknight's work); DNB, xxxv. 184-185.
MACLA6AN, WILLIAM DALRYMPLE MACLAGAN, WILLIAM DALRYMPLE

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACLAGAN, WILLIAM DALRYMPLE: Church of England, former archbishop of York, primate of England, and metropolitan; b. at Edinburgh June 18, 1826. He received his early education in his native city, and from 1847 to 1852 served in the Indian army, retiring with the rank of lieutenant. He then entered Peterhouse, Cambridge (B.A., 1856), and was ordered deacon in 1856 and or- dained priest in the following year. He was cur- ate of St. Saviour, Paddington, London (1856-58), and St. Stephen's, Marylebone, London (1858-60), after which he was secretary of the London Dioc- esan Church Building Society for five years (1860- 1865). He was then curate in charge of Enfield (1865-69), rector of Newington (1869-75), and vicar of Kensington (1875-78), as well as honorary chaplain in ordinary to the queen (1877-78) and prebendary of Reculverland in St. Paul's Cathedral (1878). In 1878 he was consecrated bishop of Lichfield, and was translated in 1891 to the arch- diocese of York, from which post he resigned in 1908. In addition to editing, in collaboration with A. Weir, The Church and the Age, Essays on the Prin- ciples and Present Position of the Anglican Church (London, 1870), he has written Pastoral Letters and Synodal Charges (1892).
MACLAY, ROBERT SAMUEL MACLAY, ROBERT SAMUEL

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACLAY, ROBERT SAMUEL: Methodist Epis- copalian; b. at Concord, Pa., Feb. 7, 1824. He was educated at Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa. (A.B., 1845). In 1847 he went to China as a mis- sionary, and was stationed first at Foochow, whence he was transferred to Japan in 1872. In both these countries he took an active part in translating the New Testament, besides being secretary and treas- urer in both missions. He was one of the founders of the Anglo-Chinese College at Foochow in 1881 and of the Anglo-Japanese College at Tokyo in 1883, and also established the Philander Smith Biblical Institute in the latter city in 1882. In 1884 he be- gan mission work in Korea by permission of the king. He was likewise president of the Anglo- Japanese College from 1883 to 1887 and dean of the Philander Smith Biblical Institute from 1884 to 1887, as well as delegate from Japan to both the Ecumenical Methodist Conference at London in 1881 and the General Conference of the Methodist Episcopal Church at New York in 1888. From 1888 to his retirement from active life in 1893 he was dean of the Maclay College of Theology, San Fernando, Cal. Besides contributing the sections on the Japanese mission of his denomination to J. M. Reid's Missions and Missionary Societies of the Methodist Episcopal Church (2 vols., New York, 1879) and on Shintoism to the same theologian's Doomed Religions (1882), he has written: Life among the Chinese (New York, 1861) and Dictionary of the Chinese Language in the Dialect of Foochow (in col- laboration with C. C. Baldwin; Foochow, 1871).
THE NEW SCHAFF-HERZOG 118 MACLEAN, ARTHUR JOHN MACLEAN, ARTHUR JOHN

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACLEAN, ARTHUR JOHN: Church of Eng- land; bishop of Moray, Ross, and Caithness; b. at Bath, England, July 6, 1858. He was educated at King's College, Cambridge (B.A., 1880; M.A., 1883), and was ordered deacon in 1882 and or- dained priest in the following year. After being missionary chaplain of Cumbrae Cathedral in 1882- 1883, he was priest in charge of St. Columba, Por- tree, with Stornoway and Caroy, in 1882-86. He then went to the Orient as head of the archbishop's Assyrian (East Syrian) mission, where he remained until 1891, being at the same time honorary canon of Cumbrae from 1883 to 1892. Returning to Eng- land, he was successively rector of Portree from 1891 to 1897, and of St. John the Evangelist, Sel- kirk, from 1897 to 1903, and Pantonian professor and principal of the Theological College of the Epis- copal Church in Scotland from 1903 to 1905. He was likewise dean of Argyll and the Isles in 1892- 1897 and canon of Cumbrae during the same period, besides being canon of St. Mary's Cathedral, Edin- burgh, in 1903-05, being honorary canon of the same cathedral since the latter year. In 1904 he was consecrated bishop of Moray, Ross, and Caith- ness. Besides editing East Syrian Lectionary (Lon- don, 1889); Old and New Syriac Grammars (in ver- nacular Syriac; 1890); East Syrian Liturgies (2 parts, 1890-92); and Modem Syriac and English Verb Vocabulary (1891), and in addition to trans- lating East Syrian Daily Offices (London, 1894); The Testament of Our Lord (in collaboration with J. Cooper; 1902); and East Syrian Epiphany Rites (in F. C. Conybeare's Rituale Armenorum, 1905), he has written: The Catholicos of the East and his Peo- ple (in collaboration with W. H. Browne; London, 1892) ; Grammar of the Dialects of Vernacular Syriac as spoken by the Eastern Syrians of Kurdistan, North-West Persia, and the Plain of Mosul (Cam- bridge, 1895); Dictionary of the Dialects of Ver- nacular Syriac as spoken by the Eastern Syrians of Kurdistan, North-West Persia, and the Plain of Mosul (Oxford, 1901); and Recent Discoveries illustrating Early Christian Life and Worship (London, 1904).
MACLEAR, GEORGE FREDERICK MACLEAR, GEORGE FREDERICK

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACLEAR, GEORGE FREDERICK: Church of England; b. at Bedford Feb. 3, 1833; d. at Canterbury Oct. 19, 1902. He was educated at Trinity College, Cambridge (B.A., 1855; M.A., 1860; B.D., 1867; D.D., 1872). He was ordained deacon in 1856 and priest in 1857. He was assist- ant minister of Curzon Chapel, Mayfair, and of St. Mark, Notting Hill; and from 1865 to 1870 assist- ant preacher at the Temple Church (all three churches in London). He was head master of King's College School from 1866 to 1880; and Boyle lecturer in 1879-80. In 1880 he became warden of St. Augustine's College, Canterbury, and in 1885 honorary canon of Canterbury cathedral. His works include: A Class-Book of Old Testament History (Cambridge, 1862); A Class-Book of New Testament History (1862); A Class-Book of the Cate- chism of the Church of England (1868); Apostles of Medieval Europe (London, 1868); Conversion of the Celts, of the English, of the Northmen (London, 1878) and of the Slavs (1879); Evidential Value of the Holy Eucharist (1883); An Introduction to the Creeds (1889); The Village Church and what it Teaches (1893); and (together with W. W. WiU- iams) An Introduction to the Articles of the Church of England (1895). He also edited in the Cam- bridge Bible for Schools, Joshua (1880) and Mark (1879); and in the Cambridge Greek Testament for Schools, Mark (1883).
MACLEOD, DONALD MACLEOD, DONALD

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACLEOD, DONALD: Church of Scotland; b. at Campsie (15 m. s.w. of Stirling), Stirlingshire, Mar. 18, 1831. He was educated at the University of Glasgow (B,A., 1850), after which he spent two years in travel. In 1858 he was ordained minister of Lauder, and four years later was called to the parish of Linlithgow. Since 1869 he has been min- ister of Park Parish, Glasgow. He was appointed one of the chaplains in ordinary to the queen in 1872 and to the king in 1901; and was convener of the Home Mission Committee of the Church of Scotland from 1888 to 1900 and moderator of the Church of Scotland in 1895-96. In theology he terms himself a ** conservative Broad churchman." Besides his activity as editor of Good Words from 1872 to 1905, he has written Memoir of Norman Macleod (London, 1874); The Reformation, 1669 to 1672 A.D. (1881); Sunday Home Service (1885); The Parochial System (1886); Christ and Society (1892); and The Doctrine and Validity of the Min- istry and Sacraments of the National Church of Scot- land (Baird lecture; Edinburgh, 1903).
MACLEOD, NORMAN MACLEOD, NORMAN

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACLEOD, NORMAN: Church of Scotland; b. at Campbeltown (38 m. w. by s. of Ayr), Argyll- shire, June 3, 1812; d. in Glasgow June 16, 1872. In his Reminiscences of a Highland Parish (London, 1867) will be found an animated account of the old Highland family — especially as repre- Early sented by his grandfather, the patri- Life. archal minister of Morven — from which he was proud to be descended, as well as graphic descriptions of the wild scenery, and free, out-of-door life, in the midst of which some of the happiest days of a happy boyhood were spent. It was, however, chiefly with the town of Campbel- town and its seafaring associations that the boy was familiar. On his impressible and sympathetic nature all the circumstances of those early years appear to have exercised a lasting influence. He entered the University of Glasgow, after an irregu- lar classical training, in 1827, where he shone more in the students' social and political meetings than in the classrooms. Of general literature, however, he appears to have read much in those days, his favorite author in poetry being Wordsworth. In 1831 he removed to the University of Edinburgh, that he might take his theological course under Dr. Thomas Chalmers, then professor of divinity in that university. Before receiving license in 1837, he spent three years in the family of a Yorkshire gen- tleman, Mr. Preston of Moreby, as tutor to his son, during most of the time residing at Weimar, or elsewhere on the continent of Europe. This first of many visits abroad had an important influence on the development of the young man's character. '• His views were widened, his opinions matured, his human sympathies vastly enriched; and, while ^ 119 VNttiU all that was of the essence of his early faith had become doubly precious, he had gained increased catholicity of sentiment, along with knowledge of the world " (Memoir, vol. i., p. 49). Macleod's first charge, to which he was ordained in IS3S, was Loudoun, in Ayrshire, a parish partly agricultural, but with a considerable weaving pop- ulation. There he gave himself with all the ardor of his nature and the enthusiasm of youth to his parochial duties, especially among the working classes. His Cracks about the Kirk for Kintra Folk, published in 1S43 shortly before the Ministry, disruption, had a large circulation and exerted considerable influence. In Dec., 1843, he was translated to Dalkeith. During his ministry there he became one of the founders of the Evangelical Alliance in 1847, and also editor of the Edinburgh Christian Magazine, In 1851 he was appointed to the large and important parish of the Barony, Glasgow, embracing at that time 87,000 souls, and here he showed preeminently his gifts as a parish minister, above all his powers of organ- ization^ his large-hearted sympathy with all classes of his parishioners, and his eloquence as a preacher. One of his special aims in the Barony was to re- claim the non-churchgoing population; for which purpose, among other schemes, he introduced with success Sunday services open exclusively to work- ing people in their working clothes. He also founded the first congregational penny savings-bank in Glas- gow, and established places of resort for working men, to counteract the temptations of the public- house. In 1857 he was appointed one of her maj- esty's chaplains, and he enjoyed in an eminent de- gree the royal favor and confidence (cf. Journal of our Life in the Highlands by Queen Victoria, Lon- don, 1868, pp. 147, sqq.). Dr. Macleod took an active part in the general work of the Church. In 1845 he was one of a dep- utation to visit the Scottish churches in Canada. In 1864 he became chairman of the Foreign Mis- sion Committee of his church, and in this capacity paid a visit to India as a deputy from the church in 1867. His last great public effort was a mem- orable speech in the General Assembly of 1872, when he resigned this position. In 1865 he became in- volved in a controversy regarding the Sabbath; while strenuously upholding the religious observ- ance of the Lord's day, he refused to base that ob- servance on the perpetual obligation of the Fourth Commandment. In 1869 he was elected modera- tor of the General Assembly. Two memorial win- dows were placed by Queen Victoria in Crathie Church, Aberdeenshire, where he had often con- ducted service; in one of these he is described as '' a man eminent in the Church, honored in the State, and in many lands greatly beloved." He married Catherine Ann Mackintosh Aug. 11, 1851. In 1860 Dr. Macleod undertook the editorship of Good Words, one of the ablest and most successful of the religious magazines of the day. Some of the more popular of his contributions to WritingB. general literature were written about the same time, many of them origin- ally appearing in Good Words. They include: The Earmst Student (Edinburgh, 1854)| a memoir of his wife's brother, John Mackintosh of Geddes; The Gold Thread (1861); The Old Lieutenant and his Son (1862); Wee Davie (London, 1864); Eastward (London, 1866); Simple Truth Spoken to Working People (1867); The Starling (2 vols., 1867); Peeps at the Far East (1871); Character Sketches (1872); The Temptation of our Lord (1873). W. LEEf, revised by Henrt Cowan. Biblioorapht: Donald Macleod (his brother), Memoir of Norman Macleod, London, 1876; A, Strahan. Norman Macleod, ib 1872; Stanley, in Good Words, 1872; Jean L. Watson. Life of Norman MaeUod, ib. 1881; R. Flint, in Scottish Divines (St. Giles Lectures). London, 1883; A. H. Japp. Oood Men and True, ib. 1890; J. WeUwood. Norman Macleod, Edinburgh. 1897; John N. Macleod, Memorials qf Rev. Norman Macleod, ib. 1898; DNB, xxxv. 217-218.
MACMILLAN, HUGH MACMILLAN, HUGH

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MACMILLAN, HUGH: United Free Church of Scotland; b. at Aberfeldy (22 m. n.w. of Perth) Sept. 17, 1833; d. in Edinburgh May 24, 1903. He was educated at the University of Edinburgh and was minister at Kirkmichael (1859-64), Glas- gow (1864-78), and Greenock (1878-98). He made his reputation by his first two books. Footnotes from the Page of Nature, or First Forms of Vegetation (Cambridge, 1861), and Bible Teachings in Nature (London, 1866), of which 30,000 copies had been sold in Great Britain up to 1907, and which had been translated into French, German, Italian, Da- nish, and Norwegian, and reprinted and widely sold in America. In these two books he first re- vealed his ability to interest persons in his favorite theme, the intimate relations between the natural and the spiritual. This was the theme of many subsequent volumes, some of which were travels and many of which were collections of sermons and essays. Of these may be mentioned: Holidays in High Lands, or Rambles and Incidents in Search of Alpine Plants (1869); The Sabbath of the Fields (1876); Two Worlds are Ours (1880); Roman Mo- saics (1888); Gleanings in Holy Fields (1899); his book of verse, The Christmas Rose (1901); his two volumes of collected addresses to children. The Gate Beautiful (1891), and The Com of Heaven (1901); posthumous were Rothiemurchus (1907), and The Isles and the Gospel (1907, with a prefatory memoir by George A. Macmillan). M'NEILL, JOHIi: Mission Preacher; b. at Hous- ton (11 m. w. of Glasgow), Renfrewshire, July 7, 1854. He received his early education in the Free Church schools at Houston and Inverkip, after which he was in the railway service from 1869 to 1877. In the latter year he resolved to prepare for the ministry, and studied successively at Edinburgh University (1877-«0), Glasgow University (1880-81), and Free Church Divinity Hall, Glasgow (1881-85). In 1886 he was ordained to the ministry and became pastor of M'Crie-Roxburgh Free Church, Edinburgh, where he remained until 1889, when he went to London as minister of Regent Square Presbyterian Church. In 1892 he left the regular ministry to become a mission preacher, and in this capacity traveled throughout Great Britain, in addition to visiting India, South Africa, Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand, the United States, and Canada. In 1908 he became pastor of Christ Church (Congre- gational), London. He has written: Sermons (3 Maoon Madafirasoar, Missiona in 120 vols., London, 1890-91); The Brazen Serpent, and other Addresses (1893); and The Lard our Shepherd, and other Addresses (1898). mAcON (MATISCO): A city of Burgundy, in which three synods were held. One, in 581, at which twenty-one bishops were present, issued nine- teen canons, of which the seventh threatens with exconununication any civil judge who dares to pro- ceed against a clerk, except in criminal cases, while canons 13-16 are aimed at the Jews. Another, in 585, at which forty-three bishops were present in person, and twenty were represented by deputies, issued twenty canons, of which the eighth forbade any one who had sought refuge in the sanctuary to be touched without the consent of the priest; while the ninth and tenth forbade the civil power to pro- ceed against a bishop, except through his metro- politan, or against a priest or deacon, except through his bishop. The third was held between 617 and 627, and decided against an attempt to do away with the rule of St. Columban. The acts and canons are not extant. BIBLIOGRAPHY: Hefele, Conciliengeadiichte, iii. 3&-41, 74, Eng. traoBl. iv. 402-409. 444. MACRINA, ma-cri'na: The name of two female saints of the early Church. 1. Macrina the Elder: Grandmother of Basil the Great and Gregory of Nyssa; d. at Neocsesarea c. 340. Of her life little is known. She seems to have married into a rich and distinguished family of Pontus, and Basil assumes {Epist, cciv.) that she was remembered in Neocsesarea for more than a generation after her death. He says that she told him stories of Gregory Thaumaturgus, and influ- enced his life by her teaching in his childhood. Gregory mentions (Vita MaerincB junioris, MPG, xlvi. 961-980) that she suffered persecution, to- gether with her husband, for her faith; and Gregory Nazianzen in his panegyric on Basil (Oratio xliii.; MPG, xxxvi. 501) states that they took refuge in the forest of Pontus and remained there consider- able time. Neither the date nor the duration of this voluntary exile is certain, since the statements of Gregory Nazianzen that it lasted seven years and took place during the reign of Maximinus (who ruled only from 311 to 313) do not agree with each other. Her day is Jan. 14. 2. Macrina the Younger: Granddaughter of the preceding and the sister of Basil the Great and Gregory of Nyssa; b. in Pontus c. 329; d. at a family estate on the Iris in the same province in the latter part of 379. She was the oldest of ten children and was betrothed at the age of twelve to a yoimg jurist of distinguished family. He died, however, before the marriage, and Macrina seems to have seized this pretext to adopt a life of celi- bacy and asceticism. After the death of her father, Basilius, she remained with her mother Enunelia until Basil returned from his studies about 358, when she, together with her mother and her serv- ants and slaves (now ranked as her sisters), retired to the banks of the Iris to lead the life of a nun. To her brothers, particularly the yoimgest, Peter, who afterward became bishop of Sebaste, this place was a school of earnest Christianity, and it was also visited by Gregory Nazianzen and Eustathius of Sebaste. When Emmelia died shortly before 370, Macrina became the head of the conununity. Her brother Gregory was present at her death and has preserved the memories of the scene both in his Vita Macrina and in his treatise On the Soul and the Resurrection. Her day is July 19. (F. Loofs.) Bibuoorapht: 1. The source are indicated in the text. Consult: ASB, Jan., i. 952-3; DCB, iii. 779; and the literature under Basil, Saint; and Greoort op Ntssa. 2. The life is most accessible in ASB, July, iv. 589-604; DCBt iii., 779-781; and ut sup. under 1.
MADAGASCAR, MISSIONS IN MADAGASCAR, MISSIONS IN

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MADAGASCAR, MISSIONS IN: While having all the evil traits of a heathen people, including in- fanticide, polygamy, and the slave-trade, the Mala- gasy believed in a supreme being called Prior to Zangahara, whom they greatly feared zSiS. and reverenced. At death, good men go to be happy forever with Zanga- hara, while bad men go to be tormented by the evil lord, Anggatyr. From 1540 to 1640 numerous colonies were foimded by the Dutch and English as well as by the Portuguese, all accompanied by 121 Macon Madagascar, Missions in slavery, all preaching Christianity, and all result- ing in failure and repeated massacres in retaliation for ill-treatment. From 1642 to 1686 several French companies also made efforts to colonize the island, enslave and Christianize the Malagasy, but these also failed, and for a time the island was left to become a rendezvous for pirates and buccaneers. In 1754 a further attempt at colonization was made by France, which was broken up by a general mas- sacre. During the next half century occasional French trading-posts were established, which met with little success. The Malagasy were not at- tracted by the rapacity, licentiousness, and cruelty of the exponents of the new religion, and during 160 years but one convert is mentioned. Not until the accession of Radama I. in 1808 were there any successful relations with the outside world. In 1818 Radama entered into a treaty with England, in which, for certain considerations, he agreed to abolish the slave-trade, while England was to re- duce the Malagasy language to writing, and estab- lish schools. This treaty was ratified in 1820, and Madagascar was open for Christian effort. With the ratification of the treaty assured, in 1818 the London Missionary Society sent the Rev. Thomas Bevan and David Jones with iSiS to their families as their first missionaries 1835. in Madagascar. They opened a station at Andovoranto, on the east coast; but within two months all of them, except Mr. Jones, died of the fever, and he was obliged to flee for his life. Returning in 1820 with Mr. Hastie, the gov- ernment agent, with the consent of King Radama, he located in Antananarivo, the capital, where the first school was opened in Dec., 1820. A large force of missionaries was sent out, the Malagasy language was reduced to writing, and the beginnings of a literature were made; more schools were opened, and the work was developed and made rapid prog- ress along educational, industrial, and evangelistic lines. Before 1828 more than one hundred schools had been established, and nearly 5,000 pupils had received the rudiments of education. Preaching services were held regularly in the capital and the surrounding villages, and a beginning was made in the Vonizongo district, a day*s journey west- ward. In Jan., 1828, the Gospel of Luke was printed in the Malagasy language, and other Scrip- tures were being translated as rapidly as possible. The outlook was most promising, when in July of this year Radama died, and was succeeded by one of his twelve wives, Ranavalona I., an utter heathen and of a turbulent disposition. A reign of terror ensued. The British resident was ordered to leave the country, and for several years a desultory war- fare was maintained with the French. Expecting opposition, the missionaries worked at high pres- sure; in 1831 the first native churches were formed, and within a few months there were nearly 2,000 members; by 1833 the translation and printing of the New Testament was completed, and that of the Old Testament was pushed as rapidly as possible. But a crisis was approaching. In 1834 the queen forbade any but the government employees to learn to read or write. In Jan., 1835, formal accusations were made against all ChdstiaDSi and the followiog month the missionaries were notified that Christian worship and teaching were banned. All natives were commanded to renounce Christianity, and the missionaries were ordered to leave the island. In spite of this edict, David Johns and Edward Baker succeeded in remaining till 1836, finishing the translating and printing of the entire From 1835 Bible and also of the Pilgrim's Prog- to 1883. ress. This year over a thousand peo- ple were massacred. The persecution continued till 1842; there was then a lull till 1849, when it broke out afresh and over 2,000 were tor- tured or slain outright. This continued with a short intermission in 1852, till the welcome death of the bloody queen in 1861. She was succeeded by her son Rakoto as Radama II. His first official act was to proclaim freedom of worship to all; Christians in captivity were released, the banished recalled, and the missionaries invited to return and continue their work. By 1862 three clergymen, a physician, a teacher, and a printer were busily gathering up the lines laid down in 1836; at this time there were some twenty-five congregations with about 900 commimicants and 7,000 adher- ents. Religious freedom continued during his short rule and that of his successor. Queen Rosa- herina; and with the accession and conversion of Queen Ranavalona II. in 1868, there was a great revival especially in the central province of Imerina, from which it spread southward to the province of Betsileo. In 1869 the idols were publicly burned, and steps were taken toward building up a Chris- tian civilization. Up to this time the London Mis- sionary Society had been alone in Madagascar, but during the next decade several other organizations entered the field, the first being the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in 1864, followed by the Norwegian Mission Society of Norway (Det Norske Missions Selskab) in 1866, the Friends of England and America in 1867, the Church Missionary Society in 1868, and a number of Roman Catholic priests from France. The work developed rapidly. Me- morial churches were erected on the four sites where many martyrs fell, schools were multiplied. By 1870 there were 250,000 converts and at least 1,500,- 000 people desiring Christian instruction. Mis- sionaries and teachers were sent by the queen to the still heathen tribes. Then followed a period of harvesting as well as seed-sowing. In 1883 France demanded a protectorate over northwestern Madagascar. On being refused war was declared, which resulted in a French protect- orate for the entire island, with an Since 1883. influx of Roman Catholic priests who at once began an active propaganda against the Protestants. In 1892 the Norwegian Lutheran Church of America established a mission, followed three years later by the Lutheran Free Church. New openings came among the Sakalavas and several smaller tribes, while there were ex- tended revivals in the principal towns of Imenna and Betsileo, and Madagascar was making progress toward a Christian civilization when in 1895 France annexed the island, and two years later the queen was deposed. At this time there was a total of 75 Protestant missionaries representing 7 societies, IbulaffAaoar. Xissions in IKmgdBhuTg Centuries idd over 1,000 native pastors, 97,800 communicants, 393,099 adherents, and 126,000 pupils in the schools. There were 7 hospitals and 10 dispensaries. The number of Roman Catholic Malagasy was estimated at 60,500. Bitter opposition to the English Prot- estant missions followed. Church buildings were confiscated, and ruin threatened their schools through the enforced use of the French language. At this crisis, the Evangelical Society of Paris took over some 1,200 schools and 62,000 pupils, and much of the work of the London Missionary Soci- ety in the two provinces of Imerina and Betsileo, and finally succeeded in obtaining for the non- French Evangelical societies a reasonable amount of religious liberty. The work of the Friends suf- fered but little from French control, and that of the Norwegians hardly at all. For several years there was friction through the Jesuits trying to gain possession of the Protestant mission properties, but this was stopped by the government. In 1905 and again in 1907 new laws were enacted aiming at the absolute suppression of mission schools, and ordering that no private school be located in build- ings used for religious purposes, thus closing 270 of the 300 educational institutions of the Paris So- ciety, and afifecting the other missions in like de- gree. Later the Y. M. C. A. was closed; family prayers were prohibited if any but members of the immediate family were present; an address could not be made or a prayer offered at a pubUc funeral; Evangelists were forbidden to continue their work; and many of the churches were closed. The Paris Society, representing all the Protestant bodies in Madagascar, entered a formal complaint with the secretary of the French colonies, and the governor-general was called to France to explain his actions, but the situation in 1908 was rapidly becoming worse. There were, in 1907, 51 Roman Catholic missiona- ries with 348 stations and outstations, and 79,000 communicants and adherents. Five Protestant socie- ties had 227 missionaries and 5,816 native helpers, 1,852 stations and outstations, 355,717 adherents, 1,951 schools and colleges with 92,126 pupils, 9 hospi- tals and dispensaries, 7 orphanages and 4 leper settle- ments. Many schools have been closed since these statistics were obtained. Theodora Crosbt Buss. Bibuoorapht: W. EIUb, Hiti. of Madaoasoar, , . . Prog- reu of the Chrittian Mi$Hon, 2 vols.. London* 1838; idem. Three Vieiie to Madaoaeear, ib. 1860; idem, Madagascar Revieited, ib. 1867; idem. The Martyr Church, ib. 1870; J. Sibree. Madagascar and ite People, ib. 1870; idem. The Great African leland, ib. 1879; idem, Madagascar before the Conqueei, ib. 1896; idem, Madagascar Miesion, ib., 1907; De la Vaimifere, Hiet de Madagascar, eee habitante et eee mieeionnairee, Paris, 1884; G. Shaw, Madagascar of To-day, London, 1886; W. E. Cousins, Madagascar of To- day, ib. 1895; J. J. K. Fletcher. Sign of the Croee in Mada- gaeear, ib. 1901; C. Keller. Madagascar, MauriHue and Other African lelande, ib. 1901; H. Froideraux, Lee Laea- rietee & Madagascar au 17. eikele, Paris. 1902; A. van Gennep, Tabou et TotSmieme h Madagascar, Paris, 1904; T. T. Bfatthews, Thirty Yeare in Madagascar, London, 1904; H. O. Dwiffht. Blue Book of Missione for 1907, pp. 23-24, New York. 1907.
MADHAVACHARTA MADHAVACHARYA

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MADHAVACHARYA: Hindu Philosopher. See India, I., 2, § 2.
MADSEN, PEDER MADSEN, PEDER

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MADSEN, PEDER: Danish theologian; b. in Vinding parish near Holstebro (160 m. n.w. of Copenhagen), Denmark, Aug. 28, 1843. He studied at Viborg and was graduated from the University of Copenhagen, 1868; taught in private schools, 1868-72; spent two years in travel and study; was called to teach dogmatics and exegesis at the Uni- versity of Copenhagen, 1874; was appointed pro- fessor of theology, 1875; was rector 1889-90 and 1903-04; and became bishop of Zealand 1909. He cooperated in working out a new series of Pericopes (q.v.), 1879-81, and assisted in reconstructing the Liturgical parts of the church hymnal; represented the theological faculty on the church council, 1884- 1886; is on the committee directing Danish missions in America, assists in directing home missions, and is active in Sunday-school work. He has also been for many years president of the Bethesda conven- tions which are doing for Denmark what the Eisenach Conference (q.v.) does for Germany. He is a member of the body which is considering new lines of polity for the Church in Denmark. He gained his doctorate with the thesis De kristnes aanddige PrcMtedomme (1879). Other works are his university programs: Del kirkdige Embede (1890); Embedet og Menighedena Sammrken % del kirkdige Arbejde (1894); and Ordinatumena Betyd- ning indenfor den luth. Kirkea/deling (1904), sup- porting the Lutheran traditional view of ministry and congregation. He had defended the same view in Bomholmeme elier den saakcUdte liUherake Miesumeforening (1886). John O. Evjen.
MA6ARITA, MA6ARITES MAGARITA, MAGARITES

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAGARITA, MAGARITES: A name given by some writers of the Middle Ages to apostates from the Christian religion, particularly those who went over to Mohammedanism. The derivation of the term is unknown. Cf. Du Cange, s.v.
MAGDALENE, ORDERS OF ST. MART MAGDALENE, ORDERS OF ST. MARY

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAGDALENE, ORDERS OF ST. MARY: Several orders established at various times and in different places for the reformation of fallen women. The oldest community of penitents under the pa- tronage of St. Mary Magdalene was probably that established at Metz, which traces its history, doubt- less with some exaggeration, back to 1005, while a similar institution is said to have been founded at Treves about 1148. In the early part of the thirteenth century several convents of magdalens were established, influenced in great part by the revival inaugurated by St. Francis, the most noteworthy being those at Goslar about 1215, and at Worms and Strasburg between 1220 and 1230. Bulls confirming the privileges of such orders were issued by Gregory IX. and Innocent IV. between 1227 and 1251. The inmates followed the Augustinian rule and were supervised by pro- vosts appointed by the general provost of the entire order. About the middle of the thirteenth century, convents of magdalens existed at Erfurt, Prenzlau, Malchow, Vienna, Regensburg, and elsewhere, attach- ing themselves now to one of the great orders and again to another. Refuges for fallen women were established at Marseilles in 1272, at Naples in 1324, and at Prague about 1372. One was founded at Paris in 1492, at Rome by Leo X. in 1520, Ids Kadaffasoar, Missions In Xagdeburff Centuries at Seville in 1550, and at Rouen and Bordeaux in 1618. At first the discipline in the convents for magda- lens was extremely severe, but gradually it grew lax, especially through the admission of those for whom the order was not originally intended, until in 1637-40 a reformation was enforced at Paris, Marseilles, Bordeaux, Rouen, and elsewhere by St. Vincent de Paul. According to the new rule, which was officially approved in 1640, the order was to be divided into three grades. The first of these was the Congregation of St. Mary Magdalene with strict vows, which were assimied after a novitiate of two yearn, and required fasting throughout Advent, and on all Fridays, as well as frequent retreats, and other acts of penance. The second grade of the order was the Congregation of St. Martha, which required no vows and permitted those who were truly penitent and reformed to reenter the world and marry. The third grade was the Congregation of St. Lazarus, which forcibly detained those who were entrusted to its care for reformation. Numerous other Roman Catholic orders of more recent times have devoted themselves to the rescue of fallen women, noteworthy among them being the Order of Our Lady of Refuge, founded at Nancy by Elisabeth de la Croix (d. 1649), the Sisters of St. Joseph, established in 1821, and the Order of the Good Shepherd, founded at Angers in 1828. The first impulse toward similar work in Evangelical circles was given by the work of Theodor Fliedner (q.v. ; see also Deaconess, III., 2, a, § 2) at Kaisers- werth beginning with 1833, and his example has since found numerous followers. (O. ZOcKLERf.)
MAGDEBURG, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF MAGDEBURG, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAGDEBURG, ARCHBISHOPRIC OF: A former archbishopric, named from an ancient city of Germany, situated on the Elbe, 88 m. w.s.w. of Berlin. The town was an important commercial center as early as the reign of Charlemagne, and its oldest church is supposed to date from this period. In the tenth century, when the city belonged to the diocese of Halberstadt, it contained a parish church, and on Sept. 21, 937, Otho I. founded there a Benedictine monastery, which he endowed richly. Later he conceived the plan of transferring the episcopal palace from Halberstadt to Magdeburg, incorporating the monastery with it, and trans- forming the bishopric into an archbishopric for the Wends. In 955 he assured himself of the papal sanction through Abbot Hadamar of Fulda, but his plans failed on account of the opposition of Archbishop William of Mainz, who refused to re- linquish Halberstadt and proposed to separate Magdeburg from the diocese of Halberstadt and create of it a new bishopric among the Wends. This plan was carried out. In the Roman synod of Feb. 12, 962, Magdeburg was made an archbish- opric with jurisdiction over all future Wendish di- oceses, according to the emperor's wish. The final negotiations took place at Ravemna in Oct., 968, when Archbishop Hatto II., who had succeeded William seven months previously at Mainz, agreed to the creation of the new archbishopric. Otho appointed Adalbert, abbot of Weissenburg in Al- sace, the first archbishop. The archdiocese of Magdebiu'g comprised the dioceses which already existed in Brandenburg and Havelberg, as well as the new bishoprics of Mersebiu'g, Meissen, and Zeitz, thus stretching from the Saale and Elbe in the west to the Oder in the east. (A. Hauck.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Sources are the Oeria <xrehiepi9Coporutn MaO' deburgensiuntt and the Catalogi^ ed. W. Schum, in MOH, Script, xiv (1883). 361 sqq., 484-486; AnnaUa MagdUbwg- entis, ed. G. H. Peris, ib., xvi (1859), 105-196; G. A. von Malventedt, Regetla archiepiaeopatua Metgdeburgetuitt 4 vols., Biagdeburg, 1876-99; and Die Maodeb. SchOppen- ehronik, ed. W. Janicke, in Chroniken der deuUehen StAdte, vol. vii., Leipsic, 1869; Gams, Series epiaeoporum, p. 288. Consiilt: F. W. Ho£Fmann, GeachidUe der Stadt MagdAwg, 2 vols., Magdeburg, 1885-86; W. Kawerau, Aua Magde' burga Verganoertheit, Halle. 1886; K. Uhlira. Oeachiehie dee Erzbietuma Magdeburo, Magdeburg, 1887; C. Eubel, Hier» archia catholiea medii ctpii, 2 vols., Manster, 1898-1901; Hauck, KDt vols, iii.-iv.
MAGDEBURG CENTX7RIES MAGDEBURG CENTURIES

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAGDEBURG CENTURIES: The first attempt to write the history of the Church from the Evan- gelical point of view. The plan of this work was conceived by Matthias Flacius (q.v.). He projected a church history from the original sources showing that the Church of Christ since the time of the apostles had deviated from the right course, a doc- umentary history of anti-Christianity in the church of Christ from its beginnings to its highest develop- ment up to the restoration of true religion in its purity by Luther. From 1553 Flacius gave his efforts to the securing of patrons to aid the work financially, whom he found among German noble- men and wealthy citizens, in Augsburg, NOrem- berg, and elsewhere, and in obtaining collaborators. The active interest and assistance manifested by the Imperial Councilor Niedbruck, curator of the Royal Library in Vienna, proved especially valu- able. Libraries had to be searched for sources and documents; for this purpose Flacius himself un- dertook journeys in Germany, and his assistant Marcus Wagner of Friemar near Gotha with great success traveled through Denmark, Scotland, Atia- tria, Bavaria, and other territories, while many manuscripts and books were purchased or donated by patrons. In Magdeburg Flacius, Johann Wi- gand, and Matth&us Judex stood at the head of the project and worked out the details of the plan. Tht Councilor Ebeling Alemann, and the physician, Martin Copus, were treasurers; assistants were trained in furnishing the necessary excerpts, which two learned masters put into shape. From Jena Flacius directed the entire work. Thus there ap- peared in Basel, 1559-74, the Ecdesiastica htstoria . . . secundum singuLas cerdurias . . . j>€r aliquoi 8tudioso8 el pio8 viros in urbe Magdthurgica, hence, called the Magdeburg Centuries. Centuries seven to thirteen were elaborated especially by Wigand in Wismar. Wigand and subsequently Stange- wald afterward worked on the three following cen^ turies without completing them (the sixteenth cen- tury, compiled by Wigand, is in Wolfenbtittel in manuscript form); attempts made by several per- sons in the eighteenth century to bring the work down to date were also without result. The " Cen- turies ^* mark immense progress in ecclesiastical historiography, not only by the tracing of the sources and the completeness with which the ma- terial was collected, but also because there is ap- Kwla ptied ID them llie pragmatic method of historical development. The anti-Roman interest shnrp- -ened the vision and helped the authors of the work to critical achievements that marked a new epoch. While the division into centuries was an obstacle to B. good grouping of the material, and the one- sided polemical aDti-Roman inlerest formed a bar- rier to an unprejudiced appreciation of the develop- ment of church history; nevertheless, there was achieved the utmost that waa possible within the limits of the sharply defined dogmatic standpoint, and the work furniahed the weapons which Protes- tantism needed in its struggle. The work, peetilerb- tiiHrnum opua, as it was called by the Roman op- ponents, made a very atrot^ impression upon the Roman Church. Canuius urged the most learmod theologians to attack it, and many pens were set in motion until in ftesar Baronius (q.v.) there was found an able opponent who drew his material from the Roman sources themselves. (G, KAWenAU.) Bibuodrapht: F. C. Baur. Die Bpocken drr kirrhliehm GtadtidilMtdirtibunii. pp. 39 H|q.. Tflbingep, 1852; B, us Hut, Dr Hitlanoeniphiii drr KerkeeirkiKleni: pp. 1:21 ■qq., Cirwbl. 1870-73; A. Jundt. La CrTilurit, di Maade- bmro. Pahs, 1SS3; SchaumkeU, Bnlraa tar Enltlrhv»9'- gachichle dir Afoed. Ccnluritn, Luilwieiburil. 189S: Bclmn, CAruMan Chardi, i. 37-3S.
MAGEE, WILLIAM COHHOR MAGEE, WILLIAM CONNOR

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAGEE, WILLIAM CONNOR: Archbishop of York: b. at Cork Dec. 17, 1821; d. in London May 5. 1891. He was a grandson of William Magee (q.v,). He was educated at Trinity College, Dub- lin (B.A., 1842; M.A. and B.D,, 1854; D.D., 1860). He became curate of St. Thomas', Dublin, in 1844; of St. Saviour's, Bath, in 1848; minister of the Octa- gon Chapel, Bath, in 1850; perpetual curate of Quebec Chapel in 1859; rector of Enniskillen in 1860; dean of Cork in 1864; dean of the Chapel Royal. Dublin, in 1866; bishop of Peterborough in 1868; and archbishop of York in 1891. He was Donellan lecturer at Dublin in 1865-66. He was the author of: Sermons Delivered at St. Saviour's Church, Both (Bath, 1862); Sermons at the Octagon Chapel, Bath (Bath, 1854); The Gospel and the Age- (London. 1884); The Atonement (1S&7); Growth in Grace (1891); Christ the Light ofaU Scripture (1892); and Speeches and Addresses (1892). BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. C. MocDDnnell. Tht Life and Carraporui- nut of wmian Cmnor ilaeti, 2 vols., London, 18SB: ■dmn, in DNB. xxxv. 313-3ie.
MAGUIRE, JOHN ALOTSIUS MAGUIRE, JOHN ALOYSIUS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAGUIRE, JOHN ALOYSIUS: Roman Cath- olic archbishop of Glasgow; b. at Glasgow Sept. 8, 1851. He was educated at St. Aloysius' College, Glasgow, Stonyhurst College, the University of Glasgow, and the College of the Propaganda, Rome, until 1875, and after being an assistant at the St. Andrew's Cathedral at Glasgow, from 1875 to 1879, was appointed secretary of the diocese, a position which he held four years. He was incumbent of Partick in 1883, but in the following year became canon of the cathedral of Glasgow, vicar-general in 1885, and provost of the chapter in 1893. In 1894 he was consecrated titular bishop of Troo- madse and appointed to assist the archbishop of Glasgow, whom he succeeded in the archiepiscopal office in 1902.
MAHAFFY, JOHN PENTLAND MAHAFFY, JOHN PENTLAND

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAHAFFY, JOHN PENTLAND: Church of Ireland; b. near Vevey (11 m. e.s.e. of Lausanne), Switzerland, Feb. 26, 1839. He was educated at Trinity College, Dublin (B.A., 1859; M.A., 1863), and was ordered deacon in 1864 and ordained priest two years later. He was elected fellow of his col- lege in 1864, where he has been senior fellow and registrar since 1899, as well as a member of the University Council since 1892. He was also pre- centor of Trinity College in 1867 and chaplain to the Lord Lieutenant of Ireland in 1880. He was assistant regius professor of Greek at Trinity Col- lege in 1864-65, 1867-68, 1870-74, 1877, and 1896, assistant in Archbishop King's divinity lectures in 1870-79, junior dean in 1869, junior proctor in 1871, Donellan lecturer in 1876, and examiner re- peatedly in various subjects, besides being evening preacher in 1865-67 and university preacher in 1863-70. From 1869 to 1900 ho was professor of ancient history at Trinity College, and was also High Sheriff of County Monaghan in 1901 and a oommisaioncr for intermedials education. In the- ology he is a Broad Churchman, Among his numer- ous publications, chiefly on clossicBil subjects, special mention may be made of the followit;g: Twelve Lectures on Primitii'e CivUitation (London, 1869); Prolegomena to Ancient Hislory (1871); Grrfk Social Ijife from Homer to Mcnander (1874); Greet Anii'g- liHies (1876); A Hiitory of Chsgicat Greek Litera- ture (1880); The Decay of Modem Preaching (1882); The Slory of Alexaniler'g Empire (in collaboration with A. Gihnan; 1887);' Creek Life aiut Thought from Alexander to the Roman Corupiejil (1887); Greet: Pic- tures drawn teith Pen and PencU (1890); The Greek World under Roman Sinay {l^yoy, The Empire <^ the Ptolemies (1895); The Silver Age of the Greek World; and What have the Greeks Done (1909); and con- tributed vol. iv. to Petrie's Hislory of Egypt; ia addition to numerous editions of classical, historical, and philosophical works and The Petrie Papyri De- ciphered and Explained (3 vols., Dubim, 1892-1905). HAHAn, ASA: Americ.in Congregationalist educator; b. at Vernon, N. Y,, Nov. 0, 1800; d. Bt Eastbourne (65 m. b. of London), England, Apr. 4, 1839. He was graduated at Hamilton CoUege, Clinton, N. Y., in 1824, and at Andover Theolog- ical Seminary in 1827. He was pastor at Pitts- ford, N. Y. (182^-31); Cincinnati, O. (1831-35); Joduon, Mich. (1356-57); and Adrian, Mich. (1857-60). He was president of Oberlin CoUege (1835-50), Cleveland University (1850-54), and Adrian College, Mich. (1860-71). In 1871 he re- tircKl to Eastbourne, England, lo devote himself to literary work. His works include: Scripture Doc- trine of Christian Perfection (Boston, 1839); Sys- tern of Intetledual Philosophy (New York, 1845); Doctnneofthe WiU (Oberlin, 1846); The True Be- liever (New York, 1847); System of Moral Philoso- phy (Oberlin, 1848); Election, ami the Injbienee of the Holy Spirit (London, 1850); Modem Mysteries Explained and Exposed (Boston, 1855); The Sci- ence of Logic (New York, 18.56); Seienee qf Natural Theology (Boston, 1867); Theism and Anlilheism (Cleveland, 1872); Phenomena of Spiritualism Sci^ entificalli) Explained ami Exposed (1875); Misun- derstood Teits t^ Scripture Explained and Eluci- dated (1876); Critical History of the Late American 1T'ar(1877); System of MenttU Philosophy {CtacB^o, 1882) ; A ulobiography; Intellectual, Moral, and SpirUual (London, 1882); and Critical History of Philosophy (2 vols., New York, 1883). HAHDI, ma'di: The title given by Moham- medans to the person who according to their ex- pectation is to exercise functions not unlike those attributed to the Jewish Messiah. He is to com- plete the work of Mohammed, convert or destroy the infidels, innusurnte the reign of justice and truth upon earth, and lead the faithful to Pararlise. The wdrd means " directed," henc«'. " one fit to puide others." The Mohammedan world is divided between those who believe that Mahdi has already come but is concealed until the time of his final manifestation (Shiaha* see Mohaumed, Mohau- hiEnANisM), and thofK who £till await his appear- ance (Sunnis). As in tlie case of the cognate Jew- ish belief, from which in part it sprang, the posses- Gion of the idea has led to many attempts to realize it. These attempts have been made both by im- postors and by those who were self-deluded. One of these was the famous veiled prophet al-Mokanna, Hakim ibn Allah, who conducted a revolt against Mohammed ben Mansur (c. 780 a.d.), while this Mohammed himself assumed the title of Mahdi; another waa Ubayd Allah al-Mahdi in North Africa, 909-S34, founder of the Fatimid dynasty; almost as celebrated was Ibn Tumart, the founder of the Muwahhid Berber dynasty, also in North Africa. A recent example is Mohammed Ahmed (1843-85), " the mad mullah," whose revolt in the region south of Egypt caused sogreat fear ofa holy war, and to whose capture of Khartum the death of General Gordon waa due. The head of the brotherhood of at-Saousi also claims to be the Mahdi. Geo. W. Gilmobe. BiBLToanAPnv; E. irtallrr, Beitraot lur MalulUcltrt da Iitamt. ReidetberE. ItWl; J. UiirmailElcr. Tkr Maluli. PaM and PnwU. New York. 188S; D. B. Mvilutuild, l>evetopnenl of Uustim ThroUnjy, Juritpmdtnet. arui Coit^ dibuwul Theom, pp. 344-246 el paasm. New Voik. IM3. MAI, mfl'1 or mni, AHGELO: Roman Catholic scholar; b. near Bergamo, Italy, Mar. 7, 1782; d. near Albano Sept. 0, 1854. He entei«d the Jesuit order in 1799. and taught in their college at Naples from 1804. At Orvieto, in the intervals of priestly duties, he applied himself to paleography, and es- pecially to the deciphering of pvalimpsests. His activity as an editor of ancient works dates from 1813, when he went to Milan as keeper of the Am- brosian Library; his field comprised both classical and ecclesiastical authors. In J819 Pius VII. ap- pointed him prefect of the Vatican library; and he was made a cardinal in 133S. The writings he edited are mainly embraced in four general colleo- tions; Veterum saiptorum iwjhj coUcctia (10 vols., Rome, 1825-38); Classiri awlores (10 vols., 1828- 1838); Spicilegium Romanum (10 vols., 1839-14); Sanctorum patrum nova bibliothcra (6 vols., 1844— 1871); and the posthumous Appendix ad opera edita ob Angela Mai (1879). ; KL. \ . 483-lSO (up MAIBIBOURG, man'TjOr", LOUIS: French Jesuit and ecclesiastical historian: b. at Nancy in 1610; d. in Paris Aug. 13, 1686. In his sixteenth year be entered the Society of Jesus, and a[|*r com- pleting his theological studies in Rome was made professbr at the Jesuit college in Rouen. Although he had no high oratorical gifts, be acquired con- siderable renown aa a preacher; but it ia as a his- torian that his name survives. Here again his equipment was quite ordinary; his works, tedious by their length, full of inaccuracies, and totally lacking in impartiality, served him as weaponi* to strike at those from whom he differed or aa me^ans to win favor for himself. His most valuable serv- ice to posterity consists in his having, by his His- toire du Luthfranisme (Paris, 1680), called forth the remarkable work of Seckendorf. In his Hisloire de I'Arianiane (1682) he indirectly attacks and ca- lumniates the Jansenistfl of Port Royal; in the His- toire de Vhiritie dee Iconoclastea (1G74) be seeks to 181 Xahan ICalmonides win the favor of Louis XIV. by upholding his rights against the Roman see, and then attempts to soothe Innocent XII. by his Histoire du achisme des Qrecs (2 vols., 1680); but soon after he took such a strong stand in favor of Louis XIV. against the pope that he was obliged to leave the order. The king named him historiographer, and used his prac- tised pen against the Huguenots in the Histoire du CcUvinisme (1682). His collected historical wri- tings (14 vols., 1686-87) include histories of the League (Eng. transl. by Dryden, History of the League, London, 1684), the Crusades (Eng. transl., 1686), the Wycliffites, Gregory the Great, and Leo the Great. (C. Pfender.) Bibuographt: L. ElUes Dupin, Biblioth^que dea auteur$ eccUaiaaHquea, Paria, 1689-1711; P. Bayle, Dictionary hUtorical and Critical, iv. 63-66, London. 1737; idem, Critique o^nfrale de Vhiatoire du calviniame de M. Maim- hourg, 2 vols.. Amsterdam, 1714; F. H. Reusoh, Index der verbotenen BUdier, pp. 683-882, Bonn, 1885; Lichten- bei^r, ESR, viii. 654-556. HAIMONIDES, moi-men'i-d^z or -dtz, MOSES (Grecized from Maimuni), also called Rambam (form- ed acrostically from Rabbi Moses ben Maimun), and by the Fabians Abu Axnran Musa Obeidallah alkortobi: Jewish rabbi and philosopher; b. at Cordova Mar. 30, 1135; d. at Old Cairo, Egypt, Dec. 13, 1204. He received his early education in the house of his father, and was instructed in nat- ural science and philosophy by Mohammedan teachers. When in 1148 the Almohade Abdel- muman took Cordova and interdicted Judaism, his father fled, and finally settled in 1159 at Fez with his family, where they lived as Mohamme- dans. The first work of young Maimuni was a jus- tification of this position. In the Iggereth ha- 8hemadhy written in Arabic about 1162, he showed that Mohammedanism required neither idolatry, murder, nor unchastity, but simply acknowledgment of Mohammed as prophet, a mere formality, by which one may avoid martyrdom, though it is best to seek a country where one can live according to his religion. [Some good authorities doubt the genuineness of this work.] In April, 1 165, Maimuni's family left Morocco and after a short residence in Palestine settled at Old Cairo. There Maimuni spent the remainder of his life. For a time he practised medicine, at the same time preparing his commen- tary on the Mishna which he completed in 1168. Two years later the government appointed him head of all Jewish congregations in E^rpt, and ten years later, about 1180, he completed his legal code, the Mishneh Torah^ which soon spread his fame abroad. In 1190 he published his religio-philosophical work, Moreh Nebhukhinif and soon afterward his treatise on the resurrection of the dead; both works were in Arabic. He was buried at Tiberias in Palestine. Maimuni's importance rests on his writings. The first important work was his " Commentary on the Mishna." Before him, aside from the two Tal- muds, only glossatory expositions of the Mishna existed. He assumed the task of classif3ring and explaining the matter contained and implied in that work. In elaborate introductions he dis- coursed on the nature of prophecy, interjecting re- marks on the natural sciences and philosophy. In the special introduction to the chapter called He- lek in the treatise Sanhedrin, he for the first time defined and formally laid down thirteen articles of the Jewish creed, which in an abbreviated form were received into the Jewish ritual. These arti- cles state: (1) That there is one God, creator of all things; (2) that he is One in the sense that no other shares his divinity (a disavowal of the doctrine of the Trinity); (3) he is incorporeal and formless; (4) he is eternal; (5) he alone is to be worshiped and without any mediator (against Christianity); (6) he ordained prophecy; (7) Moses was the great- est prophet, to whom revelation was delivered in a most complete manner (against Islam); (8) law and tradition are the complete expression of the revela- tion of God; (9) neither can ever be changed (against Christianity and Islam); (10) God is omniscient; (11) he rewards and punishes the acts of men; (12) Messiah is still to be expected (against Chris- tians and unbelieving Jews); (13) the dead shall rise again. A truly monumental work was his Miahneh Torahy i.e., " Deuteronomy," also called Yadh ha- Pazakah, i.e., ** The Mighty Hand," or simply Yadh, It is a cyclopedia comprising every department of Biblical and Jewish literature. [Portions of this work have been translated into English by Bernard: Main Principle of the Creed and Ethics of the Jews, Cambridge, 1832.] As an appendix to the Yadh he published the " Book of Laws " on the [613] pre- cepts. His third and most important work was the " Guide for the Perplexed," Arabic DalOlat elhiRrin [translated into Hebrew under the title MOreh Ne- &tlA:tm], consisting of three parts. The first part is devoted to the explanation of all expressions which are employed in the Bible in connection with deity. The second part develops his theory of creation, and shows Gen. i.-iv. to be in accord with his cosmology; it deals also with prophecy. The third part deals with the first vision of the prophet Ezekiel, the re- lation of God to the world, treats of the opposition of good and evil in the world, of God's providence and omniscience, all with the purpose of encourag- ing the more intelligent to a thorough investigation of the Old Testament. This work contributed more than any other to the progress of rational reforma- tory efforts in Judaism. Being translated into Latin a short time after its composition, it influenced Christian scholasticism. But it must be stated in praise of the latter that it never explained away the contents of revelation in favor of " reason " to the same degree as did the Jewish scholasticism which preceded it, whose most prominent representative was Maimuni. The anathemas of French rabbis against the study of the " Guide " and its burning by the Inquisition on the basis of its condemnation in 1233 were indeed foolish and without effect, but not without occasion in the rationalizing notions of the author. (G. Dalman.) Bibuographt: The editions of the worka of Maimonides are numerous, mostly published in parts which deal with sections of his productions. The editio prineep* of the Miahneh Torah is without place and date; numerous edi- tions followed, e.g., Soncino, 1490; Constantinople, 1690; 4 vols., Amsterdam, 1702; Hebrew and Eng., H. H. Bernard. Cambridge, 1832; Hebrew and German. Vienna, 1889; Eng. by J. W. Peppercome, London, 1838, 1863. His " Guide for the Perplexed " appeared first without place or date (before 1480); then in Hebrew, Venice, 1561; Berlin. 1791; in Latin. Paris, 1620; Basil, 1629; £^*r dMi. Thiau of p " THE NEW 8CHAFF-HERZ00 d Frmch. 3 v 1S3B^ luli> u Unl pub L.Un trao.1 oil.. Puis, lS56-6e: in Gntun n, Livoroo, i87a-Sl; Englinh d 1804. The Caaaaealtry on shMl N&ptM, 1482. and ia uwu- 18fi8-1703. d by cc d the plic K Hauc -Hen !.K£. BO^ vitti the St^ta^u^orl^Katatoff TdeAcribed in thi» w< vol. i.. p. 3tiii.: the ^ditaff}eQrt^KaiatoB was bjt}u^t down (o 1907 in 19091 under ■' Miumonidea "; ri, alto Baldwin, Didiomin/. vol iii,. pan L, p. 3S8. For the U(e and work of Maimonide* coneult: I. GmBsman. Maimmida, Vienna, 1892: MatmBnidtt, in Jcarith Worthia Seriat, Londoc, 1903; P. BBtr.LebenundlVirktndtf Rabbi Mita bint Mai- Bum, Praciie, 1834; S. B. Scbcyer. Dot pi/dwIoffivJie Ssin- Un df MaimonxdM. Frankfort. 1845; A. BeniKh. Two Writingt on tht Lift and Wriliiiat a! MairHonida. London, 1847; A. Gfflgcr, Moia bm Maimon. RoHobere. IKSO; M. Jdel. Dit ReliiivmpliilBiophit da Mom ben Maimon- idtt. Biealau, 18S9; S. Rubin. Spinom and Maimonida, Vienna. 1808; M. Eialer, Vorlaunnen Ober du iHditdien PKxUnophen da iViUelalltrm, Vienna. IS70; D. Rodn. Din ElKii da MaimBnidri, Breslau, 187(1; D. Kaufmann. Gt- •cAicU* dcr AUribuUnlthrt. pp. 303 «qq., Ootha, 1877; J, H. WeiB, Habbi Maw ben Maiman. Vienna, 1881; W. Bacbel. Din Bibdexeeae Mota Maimtutit, StiaabuTE, lSfi7; L. Danner. Die aUale aelronamiKlie Sdirifl da Maitrumidet. WUribuTE, 1902; J. Maai, Rabbi Mma brn 1802; 1 1 W. Ban: , M. Brai , D, Siini 3, 1807. HAinS, GEORGE PRESTOfl: Methodist Epis- copalian; b. at Newport, N. Y., Aug. 7, 1844. He was educated at Wesleyan University, Middletown, Conn. (A.B., 1870}, after having served under Ad- miral Porter in the North Atlaotic Squadron in 1864-65. He was admitted to the New York East Conrerence of his denomination in 1870, and his pastorates were as follows: Hamden Plains, Conn. 0869-71), AnBonia, Conn. (1871-";*), Chapel Street Church, New Haven, Conn. (1873-76), First Church, New Britain, Conn. (1876-79), First Church, Bria- tol, Conn. (1879-80), Grace Church, Brooklyn, N. Y. (1880-83), First Church, Waterbury, Conn. (1883-84), New York Avenue Church, Brooklyn, N. Y. (1887-92). and First Church, Mt. Vernon. N. Y. (1896-97). He was likewise presiding elder of the New York District in 1884-87, as well as superintendent of Seney Hospital, Brook- lyn, N. Y., in 1885-87 and of the Brooklyn Church Society in 1892-96. Since 1897 he has been publishing agent of the Methodist Book Con- cern, New York City. HAinZ, moints: A city of Germany, 20 m. w.b.w, of Frankfort, formerly the seat of an archbishopric and once the most important ecclesiastical center ot Germany, The beginning of the Christian Church there is involved in obscurity, although the statement of Iremeus ( /fnr. I., x. 2) that Christian communities existed in Germany in his time renders it probable that Christians then lived in Mainz. Old Christian inscriptions from the city are almost en- tirely lacking, but Ammiantis Marcellinus (xxvii. 10) statefl that in 368 a large portion of the pi^iu- lation waa Christian. According to Jerome (Epist. cxxiii. 16), tbousBiidB were killed in the church when Mainz was taken by the Germans in the early part of the fifth century, yet the effects of this dis- aster were only transitory, and ancient churches were still standing about the middle of the cen- tury, the Christian community having become Teu- tonized in the mean time. Although the bishopric of Mainz certainly existed as early as 550, Christianity scarcely flourished there, for the local church was involved in the de- cay of the Frankish Church in the closing years of the Merovingians. The revival first began when Boniface became bishop in 745 or 746, and it was then that the bishopric commenced to extend. Originally it seems to have embraced only the Prankish territories on the Rhine and Main, for bishoprics were erected in Buraburg and Erfuri; in 741, although they seem to have lapsed after the death of their first bishops and then formed part of the bishopric of Mainz. The diocese thus be- came larger tlian any other in Germany, stretching from Donnersberg in the south to the Harz in the north, and from the upper portion of the Saale in the east beyond the Nahe in the west. Between 780 and 782 the successor of Boniface, Lullus (see LuLLtTB OF Maini), was raised to the rank of an archbishop and Mainz became the metropolitan city. The province later comprised the Frankish bishop- rics ot Wtlrzburg, Eichatatt, Worms, and Speyer; the Swabian bishoprics of Augsburg, Constance, Strasburg, and Chur; the Saxon bishoprics of Pad- erborn, Hildesheim, Halberstadl, and Verden; and the bwhoprica of Bamberg, Prague, and OlmQti. In 1047, however, Bamberg was detached from Mainz and made immediately subject to the holy Bee; and aftertheelevationof Prague into anarch- bishopric in 1343 the Czech sees were taken from Mainz. (A. HArcK.) From the episcopate of Christian I. (1165-83), who had been chancellor to Frederick Barbarossa before his consecration, this olEce became perma- nently connected with the see of Mainz; and when the electoral system had its first beginning in 1125, largely at the suggestion of Adalbert I. (1109-37), it was natural that he should be one of the electors. When the number was later fixed at seven, of whom three were ecclesiastics (the archbishops of Mainz, Cologne, and Treves), the archbishop of Maine, who in any case took precedence over the other princes of the empire, ranked as the first. In the period of the Reformation, the fifty-sixth and fifty- severitb archbishops, Albert II. of Brandenburg (1514-15) and Sebastian von Heusenstamm (1545- 1555) governed with wisdom and moderation, and checked the spread of Protestantism without re- course to violence. The see maintained its dignity down to the French Revolution, at which period the archbishop had an income of 1,400,000 gulden, and was both temporal and spiritual ruler of a pop- ulation of 400,000. The territory of the see waa incorporated with the dominions of the French Re- public in 1797; and by the Peace of Luneville (1801) a settlement was made which, when the last archbishop, Frederick Charles Joseph, Baron von Erthal (1774-1802), died, allowed his coadjutor Dalberg to retain, with the title of arch-chancellor, the principolitiea of AschaAenbui^ and lU^^ensburg REUQIOUS ENCYCLOPEDIA 1^^ Bod the county of Wetilar, the see being trans- ferred to Regensburg. After the Concordat of ISOl had gone into effect, Napoleon arranged for the eleVHtion of Mainz once more to the position of a bishopric, and the cathedral, which had been Bhnost ruined in the wars, was finally restored. The territory of the ancient see was incorporated in 1814 with the grand duchy of Hesse-Darmstadt. The diocese was vacant from 1818 to 1830, when, Dn the creation of the ecclesiastical province of the Upper Rhine, it was placed under the metropolitan jurisdiction of the archbishop of Freibui^. BiBUoaiurBT; J. F. Bebmer. AmmU orcAioM«pon"» Uofuntiiumium. cd. C. Will, 2 vali,. Innnbruck. 1877-86: O. a Joiuuiu. Stnim Moguntiacarum libri. 3 vole.. Fmnli- fort, 1723-Z7; V. F. de Gudinua, C«da diplomaticui amaialBmm ro Mnfunlinai iJIuMranlium. S vols., Cot- tinsao. 1743'fiS: 8. A. WQriltwda. Dioiiait MneutUina in arcAtdiawftalu* disiita, 4 voli., MuDDhcim, 17%; Mon- UHUnla Moaanlina. ed. P. Jsfle. Berlin, IBfie^ C. G. BcMkanbcimer. Die Uainitr Bitchoft do IB, Ja/trhunderU. Maim, 1SS6: J. Juger, firifMee lur GeiihichU da Kralifit Maim, Ogmibruck. 1804: J. Schmidt, Die katholiMcU Rmlauratiatt in dtn Kvrmaimer HanrkaSlen. EItIaukmi. 1B02; J. Simon. Sland umi Hrtkvnlt irr BitcXbft dtr Mainttr Kirchmprmni im UiOelalUr, WBmsr, 1908: kod lilcrslun uader BoKiriCE, Stmr; Lt7LLDi or Hxini: KAIR, mar, WILLIAM: Church of Scotland; b. at Savoeh, Scotland, Apr. 1, 1830. He was educated at the University of Aberdeen (H.A., 1849), and was minister successively at Lochgelly (1861-64), and Ardoch (1864-69). 'From 1869 until his retirement from active life in 1903, he was minister of Earlston. Since the latter year he has resided in Edinburgh. He was likewise moderator of the Church of Scotland in 1897, and has written, in addition to numerous briefer contributions, A Digett of Law» and Deci- stoni, Ecdesitatical and Citnl. rtlating to the Con- aiitution, Practice, and Affairs of the Church oj Seothnd (Edinburgh, 1887}; The Truth about the Chunk of Scotland (1891); SpeoAing (1900); ChuTchea and the Law (1904); and The Scoai*h Churchet (1907).
MAITLAKD, SAMUEL ROFFEY MAITLAND, SAMUEL ROFFEY

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAITLAND, SAMUEL ROFFEY: Church of England; b. in London Jan. 7, 1792; d. at Glouces- ter Jan. 19, 1860. He studied at St. John's and Trinity colleges, Cambridge, and was called to the bar in 1816, but was ordained deacon in 1821 and appointed curate of St. Edmund, Norwich. In May, 1823, he became perpetual curate of Christ Church, Gloucester, but resigned in 1827. In 1838 he was appointed librarian and keeper of the man- uscripts at Lambeth Palace, which position he re- tained until 1848, when he retired to Gloucester. Among other works be wrote: An Enquiry into the Grounds on which the Prophetic Period of Daniel OTid St. John hat been Supposed to Consist of 1660 Years (London, 1828); Eruvin, or Miscellaneous Essays on Subjects Connected with the Nature, History, and Destiny of Man (1831); Facts and Documents Illus- trative of the History, Doctrines, and RHe» qf tha Ancient AUrigentes and Waldensts (1832); The Dark Ages (1844); An Index of such English Books, Printed before the Year MDC, as are noiD tn the Archiepiacopal Library at Lambeth (1845); Essays on Su6jfc(a Connected vnth the Reformation in Eng- land (1849); and Illustrations arid Enquiries Re- lattTig to Mesmerism (1849); and translated Tha Holy War of St. Bernard (Gloucester, 1827). BIBLIOGRAPHY: An »ppfBd»tive Momoir is in DNB, luv. 371-373. wbere leferenui U other literature in given.
MAJOR, JOHN MAJOR, JOHN

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAJOR, JOHN: Scotch Roman Catholic histo- rian and scholastic divine; b. at Gleghornie (22 m. n.e. of Edinburgh) in 1469; d. at St. An- drews (32 m. n.n.e. of Edinburgh) 1550. He studied at the universities of Cambridge and Paris (M.A., of Paris, 1496; D.D., 1505), became a re- gent of the latter university in 1496, also a fellow and teacher in arts and philosophy; accepted the position of principal regent and professor of phi- losophy and divinity at the University of Glasgow, 1518; returned to the University of Paris, 1525; went to St. Andrews in 1531, and was made pro- vost of St. Salvator's College in the university there, 1533, holding the position till his death. In theology Major was in essentials a stanch Roman Catholic, denouncing sternly the Hussite, Wyclifite, and Lutheran movements, but also opposing the luxurious living and tendency to expensive and grandiose architecture manifested by the monastic orders; intellectually he was a schoolman, opposed to the newer spirit then entering the universities. Gne of his titles to fame is the part he had in the education of John Knox (q.v.). The work by which he is now best known is Hiatoria Majoris BrUannicBf tarn Anglice quam Scoiice (Paris, 1521, republished, Edinburgh, 1740; Eng. transl. in the Scottish Hiatory Society* a Publications, vol. x., Edin- burgh, 1892, containing also a life of Major, an esti- mate of his character and writings, and a collection of his prefaces) . Other works were a new edition of H. Pardo's Medulla dyalecticea (Paris, 1505); a volume on logic (1508); commentaries on the " Sen- tences " of Lombard (1509-17; new ed., 3 parts, 1510-28); and a commentary on the Gospels (1529). Bibliography: Besides the life in the Eng. transl. of his " History," ut sup., consult: P. H. Brown, Oeorge Bu- ehanan, Edinburgh, 1890; idem, John Knox, i. 13, 14, 20-28, 60-62, et passim, London, 1895; T. G. Law, in Scottish Review, July, 1892; DNB, xxxv. 386-388.
MAJORISTIC CONTROVERSY MAJORISTIC CONTROVERSY

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAJORISTIC CONTROVERSY: A Lutheran con- troversy of the sixteenth century regarding the doctrine of justification by faith. The sixth article of the Augsburg Confession, like Melanchthon, maintained the necessity of good works as the nec- essary outcome of faith, not with the intention of attributing any merits to good works in themselves, but only to emphasize the necessary connection between faith and works. In his report on the Conference of Regensburg (see Regensburq, Con- ference op), Major had unmistakably taught the doctrine of faith and grace and had sharply at- tacked the view which maintained that the justi- 135 Major Makemia fied fulfil the law through works. The Leipsic In- terim, it is true, repudiated any merits of good works for justification, yet it advocated the neces- sity of works in virtue of the divine command- ment, not for their intrinsic value, but for the sake of Christ's merit and promise. When Major was about to enter upon his activity at Eisleben, Ams- dorf (q.v.) published his treatise Dclss Dr. Pommer und Dr, Major Aergemis und Verwirrung angerichtet (1551), in which he accused the latter of teaching the necessity of good works for salvation, and Major replied with his pamphlet Auf dea ehrwurdigen Herm N. von Amsdorf^a Schrift Antwort (Witten- berg, 1552), affirming his full belief in sola fide, al- though at the same time he defended the thesis that good works are necessary for salvation, for as none are saved by evil works, none are saved with- out good works. Thereupon Amsdorf, Flacius, and Callus, each in a special treatise, roused the whole Lutheran Church. The cleigy of Mansfeld, who had received Major with suspicion at Eisleben, re- quested him to give an account of his teachings; and after Count Albrecht had expelled him from the city without a trial, he published a sermon on Paul's conversion (Leipsic, 1553), in which he argued that faith can not exist without works, just as the sun can not exist without splendor. Works, according to him, are not required as meritorious, but as a token of obedience, and are not needed to gain salvation, but to retain it. Where they are not present, it is a sure sign that faith is dead. This explanation, however, failed to satisfy his op- ponents. Amsdorf still maintained that Major was a Roman Catholic, in that he taught the necessity of merit and the cooperation of faith and works in the attainment of righteousness and salvation, while Flacius pointed out that it would be impos- sible, according to Major's view, to convert the d3ring or save children. Callus more pertinently attacked the sentence that salvation must be re- tained by good works, and showed how liable to misunderstanding these words were, although he did not acknowledge that the object of his critique was not a false doctrine, but only the awkward ex- pression of a correct thought. The Mansfeld theo- logians, on the other hand, conceded in their Be- denken (Magdeburg, 1553) that there was nothing offensive in Major's doctrine, and contented them- selves with the statement that, for various rea- sons, his phraseology should be avoided. In his further publications Major sought to guard his view against misinterpretations, but was unwilling to surrender the wording of his disputed sentence. The controversy still raged, however, and in 1562 he finally decided to sacrifice the misinterpreted passage, although he could not refrain from giving vent to his anger at Flacius and his adherents, and thus exposed himself to renewed attacks. The only theologian of reputation who defended Major was Justus Menius (q.v.), who was accused by Ams- dorf, Schnepf, and Stolz of being an adherent of Major, while John Frederic forbade him to teach. He fled to Wittenberg, where he discussed the mat- ter with Melanchthon, but soon returned to Cotha after the court had assured him of his safety. His treatise Von der Bereitung zum aeligen Sterben (1556) offered, however, a new opportunity for attack, since he maintained that the beginning of the new life as wrought by the Holy Spirit in the faithful was ** necessary for salvation," and that salvation could be lost by sin, unless preserved in a pious heart, a good conscience, and a true faith. There- upon Flacius accused Menius of renewing the heresy of Major. Menius was suspended from office, siun- moned to Eisenach, and tried by Victorin Strigel, whereupon Amsdorf and his adherents drew up seven theses and insisted upon the signature of Menius. To their surprise he signed them without hesitation, declaring that his teachings had always conformed to them. The adherents of Flacius looked upon this act as a recantation, but they ac- tually obtained nothing but a strict censorship which was soon to involve them in their turn, while the final decision was merely that Major and Menius had confused faith and works. Amsdorf, however, who had maintained as early as 1554 that good works are not necessary for salvation, now went so far as to declare that good works are in- jurious to salvation, but Menius escaped these im- fortunate dissensions by resigning his offices in Thuringia. Melanchthon had at first held aloof from these controversies, but after Major had been publicly accused by the theologians of Weimar in their fatal protest at Worms in 1557, he declared that Major's words had been evoked by the Antinomians, who considered justification by faith compatible with a sinful life; while he also believed that men like Amsdorf should be restrained by the thesis that new obedience is necessary according to the divine order and the sequence of cause and effect. The controversy of Major was revived in the March of Brandenburg from 1558 to 1563 between J. Agri- cola and A. Musculus as opposed to Provost Buch- holzer in Berlin and Professor Abdias Praetorius in Frankfort-on-the-Oder. It ended with the defeat of the adherents of Melanchthon. The theses of both Major and Amsdorf are rejected in the fourth article of the Formula of Concord, which upholds the necessity of good works in so far as faith is never alone. Works belong to faith as heat and light to fire, and are, therefore, not injurious, but are proofs of eternal life in the faithful. (G. Kawerau.) Bibliography: C. SchlQaeelburg, CataloQua hereticorum, book vii., Frankfort, 1599; C, A. Salig, Historie der auga- burgitchen Confession, i. 637 sqq.. iii. 38 sqg., Halle, 1730; G. J. Planck. Oeschichte der Entstehung . . . unsers pro- testantisdien Lehrbegriffs, iv. 469 sqq., Leipsic, 1796; W. Preger, M. Flacius, i. 356 sqq., Erlangen, 1869; F. H. R. Frank, Theologie der Concordienformel, ii. 148 sqq., 4 vols., Erlanjcen, 1858-65; G. L, Schmidt, Justus Menius, U, 184 sqq., Gotha. 1867; J. C. L. Giewler, Church His- tory, ed. H. B. Smith, iv. 438. New York, 1868; G. Wolf. Zur GeschichU der deutschen Protestantcn 1666-69, Berlin, 1888; Kurt*, Church History, ii. 352. New York, 1894; F. Loofs, Dogmengeschichte, pp. 898 sqq., Halle, 1906; Moeller, Christian Church, vol. iii. passim. MAKEMIE, ma'k6-m!, FRANCIS: American Presbyterian; b. at Rathmelton (32 m. n.e. of Donegal), Ireland, 1658; d. in Accomac Co., Va., in the summer of 1708. He was educated at Glas- gow University and was ordained as a missionary to America by the presbytery of Laggan, Ireland, in 1682. He itmerated in Maryland, Virginia, and Xalaohi 186 Barbados, and is said to have founded the church at Snow Hill, Md. In 1704 he went to England to seciu^ aid for the Presbyterian Church in America, and on his return in 1706 he helped to organize at Philadelphia the first presbytery in America. In 1707 he was arrested at Newtown, L. I., for preach- ing without a license and had to pay heavy costs besides being confined in jail for several weeks. He wrote a catechism which was attacked by G. Keith^ when he wrote a spirited reply praised by I, Mather. He has been regarded as the founder of Presbyteriamsm in America, but there are rec- ords of at least two other ministers before him. Bibuooraprt: C A. Briggs, American Pretbyterianum, New York. 1885; W. B. Sprague. AnnaU of the American Puljrii, iii 1-4, ib. 1868; G. P. Haya, Pretbvteriane, pp. 63. 74-76. ib. 1802; R. E. Thompson. American Churth Hittory Serie$, vol. vi. ib. 1896; J. H. Patton. Popular UiML of Oie Preebi/terian Church, U. 8. A., ib. 1900; C. L. Thompson. The Preabi/teriane, ib. 1903; DNB, xzxy. 890- 891.
HALALAS, JOHN MALALAS, JOHN

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MALALAS, JOHN: Greek chronographer; lived at Antioch in the first half of the sixth century. He is presumably identical with a Johannes Rhetor whose work Evagrius (q.v.) used as one of his sources; he was probably a Syrian of Greek train- ing and by profession an advocate (malal^rhetCr). Under his name the Greek text of a general Chron- icle (Chronographia) has been transmitted (ed. L. Dindorf in CSHB, Bonn, 1831; reprinted MPO, xcvii. 9-970) which reaches, in its present form, to 563, but was originally, perhaps, continued as far as 573. Whether the work, in its whole ex- tent of eighteen books, is by but one author, is fairly open to question. Books i.-xvii. and the early portion of xviii. appear to have been written prior to 540; whereas the greater part of book xviii., wherein Constantinople, not Antioch, is the center of the situation, was not closed till after the death of Justinian, and was then consolidated with the other books. The dogmatic character is not uni- form, the original Monophysite treatment bearing the appearance of having been revised by an ortho- dox editor. Book xviii. certainly emanates from an orthodox writer. The last four books, which narrate the events from Emperor Anastasius down, aje important as a source for ecclesiastical history, in spite of the puerility of conception and the nar- row horizon. Being in high favor as a book for the people, the Chronicle was repeatedly transcribed and copied, but ultimately it was superseded by later annalists (Theophanes, Georgius Monachus, Zonaras), and has thus been preserved in only one manuscript, while even this is an abridged revision (Codex Baroccianus of the twelfth cen- tury in the Bodleian library at Oxford; cf. J. B. Xalan Xahky Arohipelaffo 138 Buig in ByzanHniache Zeitschrift, vi., 1897, pp. 219-230). G. Kroger. Bibliography: Krumbacher, Oeadiidite, pp. 325-334 (con- tains a very full and adequate list of the earlier litera- ture); £. Patzig, in ByzanHniache ZeiUt^nft, vii (1898). 111-128; C. E. Gleye. in the same, viii (1899). 312-327; J. Haury, in the same, ix (19(X)), 337-366; DCB, ill 787-788; KL, viii. 644-645.
MALAN, SOLOMON CJESAR MALAN, SOLOMON CAESAR

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MALAN, SOLOMON CAESAR: Orientalist; b. at Geneva Apr. 22, 1812; d. at Bournemouth (24 m. w.s.w. of Southampton), England, Nov. 25, 1894. He was of an old Waldensian family, and the son of C^sar Henri Abraham Malan (q.v.). He was educated at St. Edmund Hall, Oxford (B.A., 1837; M.A., 1843), and was ordered deacon in 1838 and ordained priest in 1843. From 1838 to 1840 he was classical lecturer at Bishop's College, Calcutta. He was then curate of Alverstoke, Hampshire (1843-44); Crowcombe, Somersetshire (1844-45); vicar of Broad Windsor, Dorsetshire (1845-85); rural dean (1846-53); and prebendary of Salisbury cathedral (1870-75). Malan was a good linguist, being acquainted with twenty-five to thirty lan- guages. He made two or three journeys to the East after his return from India, one in particular to Nin- eveh, passing through the Caucasus and preaching in Georgian at Kutais. Among his numerous works may be mentioned: Outline of Bishop's College and of its Missions (London, 1843); Plain Exposition of the Apostles' Creed (1847); Systematic Catalogue of the Eggs of British Birds (1848): Vindication of (he Authorised Version of the English Bible (1856); Aphorisms on Drawing (1856); Magdala: a Day by the Sea of Galilee (1857); Bethany: a Pilgrimage (1857); Coasts of Tyre and Sidon (1858); LeOers to a Young Missionary (1858); On Ritualism (1867); Outline of the English Jewish Church (1867); Holy Sacrament of the Lord's Supper y According to Scrip- ture, Grammar, and the Faith (1868); Parables of Jesus Christ, Explained to Country Children (2 vols., 1872) ; Miracles of Our Lord, Explained to Country Children (1881); and Original Notes on the Book of Proverbs (3 vols., 1889-93). He also translated many works, chiefly religious, from the Russian, Welsh, Armenian, Arabic, Syriac, Coptic, Ethiopic, Georgian, Chinese, Japanese, and other languages; among them: the San Tsze King (from the Chinese; 1856); the Gospel according to St. John (from the eleven oldest versions; 1862); History of the Georg- ian Church (from the Russian; 1866); Life and Times of St. Gregory the Illuminator (from the Ar- menian; 1868); Conflicts of the Holy Apostles (from the Armenian; 1871); Misawo, the Japanese Girl (from the Japanese; 1871); History of the Copts, and of their Church (from the Arabic; 1873); and The Book of Adam and Eve (from the Ethiopic; 1882). BIBLIOGRAPHY: A biography was written by his son, A. N. Malan, London, 1897, and a notice by Maodonnell ap- peared in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society , 1805; cf. DNB, Supplement, vol. iii 133-134.
MALAY ARCHIPELAGO MALAY ARCHIPELAGO

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MALAY ARCHIPELAGO: A chain of four large and numerous small volcanic islands, lying to the southeast of Asia, extending from the Malay Peninsula to New Guinea, also known as the Dutch East Indies. They are divided into the Larger Sunda Islands — Sumatra, Java, Borneo, Celebes; the Lesser Sunda Islands — Bali, Lombok, Sum- bawa, Flores, Sumba, Sawu, Timor, etc.; and the Moluccas — Buru, Ambon, Ceram, Almaheira, Ter- nate, the Sangi, and the Talaut Islands, etc.; area, 943,000 square miles; population (estimated); 32,435,000. The Philippine Islands (q.v.) are sometimes included in the group. An area of about 84,000 miles on North Borneo is imder British control, while Portugal has 7,500 square miles of territory on East Timor; the rest of the archipelago is under Dutch control. The majority of the inhabitants are Malays, divided into the savage and semi-civilized tribes. There are over half a million Chinese, 60,000 Dutch, and about 3,000 Europeans and other foreigners. A Hindu invasion antedating the Christian era was followed first by a Buddhist and later by a Brahmin wave, each leaving its impress on the na- tives. A Mohammedan invasion in the twelfth century resulted in a wide-spread Mohanmiedanism, and Arab influence was paramount till the coming of the Dutch in 1521. In 1602 the Dutch East In- dia Company established itself in the archipelago and at once began the work of civilizing and Chris- tianizing the people, which was demanded by its charter. The Malay language was reduced to wri- ting, and numerous schools were established; by 1688 the New Testament was given to the people, and in 1733 the Old Testament was also completed. But the work of these missionaries of the company was largely perfunctory; any person so desiring was baptized and ranked thereafter as a Christian, though heathen in habit. The company dissolved in 1795, and no further Protestant mission work was attempted till 1812, when the Netherlands Society sent its first missionaries. They were fol- lowed by the English Baptists (1820), the Amer- ican Board (1834), the Netherlands Mennonite Mis- sion Union (1847), the Java Committee (1855), the Ermelo Missions Society (1856), the Netherlands Missions Union (1858), the Missions of the Re- formed Churches in the Netherlands (1859), the Utrecht Missionary Society (1859), and the Nether- lands Lutheran Church (1882). Other societies are the Rhenish Society (1835), the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel (1837), the Neukirchen Missions Institute (1882), and the Methodist Epis- copal Society (1889). However, the results of missionary work were meager, largely owing to the attitude of the gov- ernment toward Mohammedanism, which flourished under Dutch rule, and to the fact that the missions were uniformly poorly manned, with the exception of those of the Rhenish Society. There was a lack of aggressive work, and heathen remained heathen or became Moluunmedan. Even the Christian communities that resulted from the early missions were neglected. Dutch missionaries were scat- tered throughout the archipelago, their most suo- cessful work being in the Minahassa district of Celebes, which is practically Christianiased. The Rhenish Society has worked among the Dyaks of Borneo, the Bataks of Simmtra, and on the smaller islands of Nias and Mentawei. The Society for the Propagation of the Gospel occupies British Borneo, with stations in North Borneo, Sarawak, and La- buan, and the Methodist Episcopal Society (U. S. .\.) has a small work in Java, Simmtra, and Borneo. The English Baptists and the American Board both attempted to establish missions in Simmtra early in the nineteenth century, but the EkigUsh mission- aries abandoned the field, and the Americans were massacred by the natives. The most successful work of the Dutch societies in the Celebes, Moluo- cas, and adjacent isles was taken over by tlie Colonial State Church in 1865, but their '* missions helpers " were restricted to work among the nom- inal Christians, and did nothing for the heathen multitudes. In 1888 the secretary of state for the Netherlands Colonies notified the Protestant Neth- erlands societies that " the government would value it highly if they would increase their sta£F of mis- sionaries so as to counteract the growing influence of Islam." Nothing came of it, and the Dutch mission force still remained inadequate at the be- ginning of the present century, and the Dutch gov- ernment continued to obstruct the work of Chris- tians while giving free scope to the Mohammedans. At that time there were about 345,000 Protestant and 30,000 Roman Catholic Christians. Of late years the attitude of the government has been more friendly, the spread of Mohammedanism has had a decided check, and there has been progress all along the line. There are 11 Protestant societies, working in 521 stations and outstations; 269 mis- sionaries and 592 native helpers; 492 schools, with 23,168 scholars; 3 hospitals and dispensaries; 148,708 professed Christians. The Roman Catho- lics have 38 stations and outstations, 50 priests, 29 schools and 6 orphanages; and 50,000 oonmiuni- cants and adherents. Their missionaries are under the apostolic vicar of Batavia, and come from the Foreign Missionary Society of Paris. They are working in both British Borneo and throughout the Dutch possessions, nmking special efforts in the islands where the Protestants are doing least. Their work is noteworthy for the laige number of orphanages. The work throughout the archipelago is noted for the number of con- verts from the Mohammedans. The number of converts during the last twenty-five years is esti- mated at 20,000. Theodora. Crosby Bubs. BIBLIOGRAPHY: For description of the people consult: A. C. Haddon, Headhunten, Black, White^ wnd Brown, London, 1901; W. H. Furneae, Home-Life of Borneo Head-UunUn, Philadelphia, 1002; H. Breitenetein, iff/ JaAr« in . . . Bor- neo, Java, Swmaira, 2 vols., Leipsie, 1800-1900. For mis- sions eonsult: H. Needham, **Ood Firet"; or, Heeter Needham'e Work in Sumatra, London, 1800; H. Dijkstra, Het evangdie in onxe Ooet, 2 vols.. Lesrden. 1000-01; 8. Oooloma. De Zendingeeewo voor NeierJandeth Ooe^lndU, Utrecht, 1001.
MALCOM, HOWARD MALCOM, HOWARD

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MALCOM, HOWARD: American Baptist; b. in Philadelphia Jan. 19, 1799; d. there Mar. 25, 1879. He was educated at Dickinson College, Pa., and Princeton Theological Seminary. Oi^ dained in 1820, he was pastor at Hudson, N. Y. (1820-26), Boston (1827-^), and Philadelphia (1849-51). He was president of Georgetown (Ky.) College (1840^9), University of Lewisburg (1851- 1857), and Hahnemann Medical College (1874-79). He was general secretary of the American Sun- day School Union (1826-27); from 1835 to 1838, as deputy of the Baptist Missionary So- ciety, he traveled in India, Burma, Siam, China, and Africa. He wrote: A Bible Dictionary (Boston, 1828); Travels in Southeastern Asia (2 vols., 1839); and Index to Religious Literature (Boston, 1868).
MALLET, FRIEDRICH LUDWI6 MALLET, FRIEDRICH LUDWIG

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MALLET, FRIEDRICH LUDWIG: German pul- pit-orator; b. at Braunfels (37 m. e.n.e. of Gob- lenz) Aug. 4, 1793; d. at Bremen May 5, 1865. He was educated in the universities of Herbom and TQbingen, and during his student days served in the Napoleonic wars of 1814-15. In Dec, 1815, he became assistant in St. Michael's Church, Bremen, and succeeded the aged pastor, Buch, two years later. In 1827 he was chosen third pastor at the laige church of St. Stephen in Bremen, where he officiated for the remainder of his life, becoming first pastor after the deaths of his superiors, MUUer and Pletser. MAlmesbnry 142 Mallet was preeminently a preacher of simplicity and orthodoxy, as may be seen from the collection of his sermons and addresses edited by his son at Bremen in 1867. He was also active as an editor, and in 1832 founded at Bremen the Bremer Kirchen- bote, which ran until 1847, when it was replaced by the Bremer Schlussel (1848-50) and the Bremer Post (1856-60). He polemized against the Roman Catholics and against rationalism, to both of which he was bitterly opposed. In this spirit he wrote Ud}er den HeUigenr- und Bilderdienat in der romi- achen Kirche (Bremen, 1842), Zeugnisse (2 parts, 1845), Gestdndniss (1845), and Memoiren eines Weltmannes (1847). From 1848 to 1852 he was involved in a controversy with the pantheistic pas- tor, Rodolf Dulon, against whom he wrote several pamphlets and who was finally dismissed from his position. Mallet's activity in all movements for Christian union and missions was untiring. In 1819 he assisted in the establishment of the first Bremen missionary society, and in 1834 in the foundation of the first young men's association and a society for the dissemination of Christian tracts, while in 1844 he devoted 'much of his energy to the furtherance of the Gustav-Adolf-Verein. His principal writings, in addition to those already mentioned, are: Die Weisen mia dem Morgenlande (Bremen, 1852); Paesions- und Festpredigten (Frankfort, 1859); Altc8 und Neuea (Bremen, 1864); and the posthumous Neuea und Alles, edited by his son (Bremen, 1808). (J F. iKENf.) Bibuoorapht: C. A. Wilkens, Friedrich McUUl, . . . eine Biographie, Bremen. 1872 (a model biography); H. Hup- fold. Friedrich Ludwig Mallet, ib. 1865; W. H. Meurer, Zur Erinneruno an Friedrich Ludwig Mallet, ib. 1872.
MALVENDA, TOM AS MALVENDA, TOMAS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MALVENDA, TOMAS: Spanish Dominican; b. at Xativa (43 m. s.s.w. of Valencia) 1566; d. at Valencia May 7, 1628. He devoted his chief efforts to the text of the Bible, although he also wrote on dogmatics and church history. In 1600 he sub- mitted to Cardinal Baronius a list of pa.ssages in the Annales ecclesiastici and the Roman Martyrol- ogy which he deemed incorrect, and the cardinal thereupon summoned him to Rome, where the gen- eral of his onler entrusted him with the correction of the Dominican breviary, missal, and martyrol- ogy, his work appearinu; in 1(503. At the direction of the Congregation of the Index, Malvcnda re- vised the Bibliotheca patrum of Margarin de la Bigne (9 vols., Paris, 1575-76), and in 1607 pub- lished at Rome his critical notes on this work. About the same time he Ix'gan his Annales ordinis fratrum prcedicatorum, but carried it only through thirty years (ed. D. Gravina, 2 vols., Naples, 1627). In 1610 Malvenda was recalled to Spain and ap- pointed by the grand inquisitor on a committee to prepare a Spanish Index lihrorum prohibitorum. His chief work, however, was his commentary on the Bible, together with a new translation from the Hebrew, as far as Ezek. xvi. (5 vols., Lyons, 1650). Among his numerous other writings spe- cial mention may be made of his Libri novem de Antichrieto (Rome, 1604) and his De paradiso voluptatis (1605). (O. ZOcKLERf.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. Qu^tif and J. fichard, Scriptoree ordinis jfrcBdicatorum, ii 454-455. Paris, 1721; L. £. Du Pin. NouvMe biblxoihhme des auteurt eeeUeiaatiquee, xvii. 86- 93, 36 vols., Paris, 1608-1711; H. Hurter, Nomendator lUeraritu theciooia recetaiorit, i. 312-314. Innsbruck, 1802; F. H. Reusch, Der Index der verbotenen Biuher, i. 554-555. Bonn* 1883; KL, viu. 582.
MAMMON MAMMON

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAMMON: Aramaic for "wealth" or "gain." It is a word of uncertain etymology, and is found in the Aramaic (" what one has saved "), in Syriac, and in Carthaginian and Phenician {lucrum, " wealth "), possibly in the Arabic (" a deposit "). The Targum of Onkelos renders by it the Hebrew for "ransom" (Ex. xxi. 30; Num. xxxv. 31), also the word " gain " (Gen. xxxvii. 26; Ex. xviii. 21). Accordingly in Matt. vi. 24 and Luke xvi. 9, 11, 13, the word must mean " possession," " wealth," or "money." The meaning was not necessarily sinis- ter; the accompanying adjectival expression gives it that sense in the Targum on I Sara. viii. 3; Isa. xxxiii. 15; Ezek. xxii. 27; Hos. v. 11; Prov. xv. 27; Hab. ii. 9; and Ezek. xxii. 13. In Luke xvi. 9 sqq. the meaning is not that money sinfully ac- quired is best spent in alms (Holtzmann), but that the earthly possessions of the children of the king- dom of God are called " unrighteous " because not properly held by them, since their rightful possession is the kingdom of God. The good which is foreign [to one's nature] he is to bestow in order to obtain that possession which is really his own. There is known no god or demon " mamon " as Weiss (on Luke xvi. 9) supposed. (G. Dalman.) Biblioorapiit: The commentaries on the pastaaf^^ cit«d, particularly that of Plummer on Luke xvi. 0-13 (New 148 Malmesbory York, 1806); the lexicons (Hebrew, Aramaic, and Greek) on the word; DB, iii. 224; EB, iii. 2012-16; JB, viii 278 (elaborate). MAMRE. See Judex, II., 1, § 5. MAN. r. Origin of Man. II. Unity of the Human Race. III. Antiquity of Man. While in man the natural realm finds the cul- mination of its development, there develops in him at the same time a new realm, the kingdom of the spirit. The noblest philosophical thinkers, ancient and modem, as well as the Scripture, corroborate this view of the twofold nature of man. They place man in close connection with the preceding works of creation, and at the same time represent him as the product of a new creative thought'and act (Gen. i. 26, ii. 7). L Origin of Man: Man was created in God's image. The consensus gentium bears testimony to the truth of this Biblical sentence. According to most pagan myths of creation, the human race was created by the gods or the deity. Some anthropol- ogists like to base their theories upon legends in natural religions (India, Tibet, etc.), which trace the original man back to the ape; but other leg- ends as numerous and as old as those (ancient Mexico, West Africa, South Arabia, Indo-China) consider apes as degenerated and fallen descend- ants of men. More important are the traditions of the civilized nations of antiquity, which almost unanimously agree that man is the creature of God. Of these may be mentioned the Chinese tradition about Fo-hi or Pao-hi, the Babylonian, v^ith its many points of agreement with the Biblical account; the Egyptian Book of the Dead, with its praise of the " Divine Architect, who made the world to be the home of man, the image of the Creator''; Hesiod's and Ovid's poems. It is only since the middle of the eighteenth cen- tury that the materialistic philosophy of men like Lamettrie, Holbach, Helvetius (qq.v.) degraded man to a mere animal, or even a machine. In re- cent times many anthropologists have adopted the same view. Carolus Linnaeus (1707-1778) classi- fied man with the ape as the highest representative of the vertebrates, but pronounced him to have been " created with an immortal soul, after the di- vine image," and called him " the only one among the creatures blessed with a rational soul for the praise of God " {Systema Naturce, 6th ed., 1748). J. F. Blumcnbach (1752-1840), the real founder of anthropology as a science, never doubted that man was distinguished from the whole animal world by his upright walk, perfectly developed hands, pro- truding chin, and articulate speech. Other in- vestigators, basing their theories on the study of embryology, paleontology, and experiments in breeding animals and plants, have come to the conclusion that man is the result of a process of development, some primeval type of ape being his immediate ancestor (see Evolution). This view has been advanced especially by Charles Darwin, Thomas H. Huxley, John Lubbock, E. B. Tylor, and in Germany by Ernst Haeckel, Oskar Schmidt, H. Schaafifhausen, O. Caspari, and others. This theory, however, is only a hypothesis the scientific untenableness of which is evident from the following facts: (1) There are anatomical dif- ferences between man and even the most devel- oped apes (gorilla, chimpanzee, etc.), so important that the assumption of their common origin is sub- ject to the greatest difficulties. According to the investigations of iEby, Bischoff, R. Owen, and others, the capacity of the lowest human skull (the natives of New Holland) is seventy-five cubic inches; while the largest capacity of the gorilla is thirty-four cubic inches. The average weight of the brain of a European is fifty-seven ounces; that of the negro, from thirty-eight to fifty-one ounces; but that of the gorilla from seventeen to nineteen ounces. (2) No validity can be attached to the embryological proof, consisting in the supposed identity of the fetal phases of the development of man with those of the higher mammals, especially the apes. The exact repetition of lower animal forms of existence in the steps of the development of the embryo does not take place in reality, as Haeckel has asserted. His, Goette, Kdlliker, and other authorities on the doctrine of evolution de- cidedly disagree with Haeckel in many details. (3) The proof from paleontology is also full of gaps and deficiencies. The assumed human apes (pithecanthropi) liave so far been found neither in a living nor in a fossil condition. Neither the Neanderthal skull, nor the Engis skull, nor the Cro-Magnon skull, nor any other human remains excavated in a fossil condition show an essential approach to the type of the ape. (4) The doctrine of descent assumes for the sake of certain analogies genealogical relations of affinity and changes of organisms in great numbers, but not one case of a definite and permanent change of an organic si)ecies into another has been accurately observed. It as- sumes a process of natural selection such as a gardener or a breeder pursues; but as far as em- pirical knowledge goes, the character of the indi- vidual vegetable and animal species has never changed. In order to substantiate its view, its advocates postulate millions of years; but whether the epochs of geological formation really require such an immense amount of time as Darwin needed for his hypothesis is still doubted by geologists. Geology, too, shows that the specific groups of organic beings were distinct from the very begin- ning. The truth of the Biblical words that " God created everything after its kind," is confirmed as much by the natural life of the present world as by the facts of the former ages of geology. (5) The Darwinian hypothesis of descent does not give due consideration to the great difference between man and animal in a psychological respect. Man repre- sents an entirely new phase of exbtence, being dis- tinguished from the preceding organisms by his freedom, self-consciousness, and endowment of speech. Conservative investigators like Agassiz, Rudolf Wagner, Wigand, and Dubois-Reymond have always ridiculed the hypothesis that considers the higher nature of man the product of a purely natural development. In the same way, men like A. de Quatrefages and the French physiologists fol- lowing him, E. Bouchut, Tandon, and others^ and mani ohaster 144 recent German critics of Darwin like Hans Driesch, Haacke, and Gustav WolfiF acknowledge the radical distinction between man and animal; and Wallace, who with Darwin is the author of the theoiy of natural selection, holds that in the case of man, the natural selection was the work of God. n. Unity of the Human Race: The fact that the human race descended from one pair (Gen. i. 27) is confirmed by numerous traditions of pagan- ism. It is true, however, that there appeared also polygenism or autochthonism, the theory of epony- mous ancestors (see Epontm), which was repre- sented especially by the Greeks and revived in the period of the Renaissance. Blumenbach opposed polygenism in his work, De generis humam varietate nativa (GOttingen, 1795); similarly Prichard, John Herschel, the two Humboldts, and others. Since the appearance of Darwin's doctrine of evolution the theory of monogenism has been adopted more generally. Several of the most important ethnol- ogists, Oskar Peschel, T. Waits, A. de Quatrefages, Keane, adhere to the theory of the unity of the human race, or at least to its origin from a com- mon hearth, if not from one single pair. In favor of Biblical monogenism may be advanced: (1) The different races of men do not lose their power of procreation by intermarriage. Blumenbach, Buf- fon, Johann MtlUer, Waits, Quatrefages, and others have emphasised this fact as decisive for the unity of the race. (2) Among all human races, the skele- ton, the period of pregnancy, and the average duration of life are the same. (3) Apparent di- vergencies of the races in the formation of the skull, the quality of skin, hair, etc., may be explained by climatic conditions. (4) Linguistic objections against monogenism do not stand upon a solid basis, since in the course of hundreds and thou- sands of years languages are subject to consider- able changes. (5) Archeology and the science of religions furnish important material for the proof of the original unity of the himian race. The wide circulation of certain religious traditions in primi- tive history, especially of the legends of the flood, can hardly be explained otherwise than by the as- simiption of primitive relations of aflinity. More- over, the legends of the American people pointing to repeated immigrations of their ancestors from Eastern Asia contradict the assumptions of Amer- ican autochthonism or nativism, as it was repre- sented by George Squier, H. Bancroft, Lorenz Die- fenbach, J. G. MUller, and others. (6) The different races of humanity reveal a thoroughgoing imi- formity and spiritual relationship also in a psycho- logical and ethical respect. Even the most bar- barous tribes are capable of participating in the higher spiritual interests of humanity. The idea of the impotence of the Christian religion as a dvilising power over against the stupid resistance of lower races (cf. De Gobineau, Essai 8ur Virir igaliU dea races humaines, Paris, 1853) has been amply refuted by the activity of Christian mis- sionaries among the savages of all parts of the world. IIL Antiquity of Man : The usual system of Biblical chronology makes the period from Adam to Christ cover 4,000 years (see Time, Bibucal Rbcxoning of). Such a short period seems to be inconsistent with the alleged unity of the race, but the effects of sin must not be left out of account in determin- ing this question. There is much in the chrono- logical tables of the Old Testament to make any calculation based upon them of questionable ao- curacy. There is at any rate some truth in the words of Chalmers, that " the sacred writings do not fix the antiquity of the globe," and those of Le Hir and De Sacy, *' There is no Biblical chro- nology." It is quite possible that the lists of the patriarchs in Gen. v. and xi. are incomplete. The Bible, in fact, seems to allow for a longer duration of the human race by several thousands of years than the usually accepted chrondogy makes out. The records of Egyptian history seem to make an extension of the chronology necessary (see Egypt). The primitive history of Babylonia may be traced back even further than that of Egypt. From re- cent discoveries in Babylonia (q.v., III., { 6), espe- cially those of Hilprecht (since 1893) it seems to be sufficiently evident that South Babylonia possessed a royal dynasty already before Saigon, so that it may be safely assumed that the beginnings of Baby- lonian culture date back at least 5,000 years (see Babtu>nia, v., { 1, VI., 1-2). Of less value are the arguments based upon geological calculations according to which the age of man is measured by ten thousands of years. There is as yet no reliable geological chronometer, but it is proved by recent discoveries in caves that man must have lived at the close of the great ice period, that is, during the great geological deluge; but when this period began and when it ended, remains still a matter of uncer- tainty. Quatrefages justly criticises the lavish extravagance with which many Darwinians cal- culate time. Evefi Lyell was obliged, in the later edition of his Geological Evidences of the Antiquity of Man (London, 1863), to modify his earlier state- ments. E. B. Tylor, it is true, in his Anthropology (London, 1881) holds that some dozens of centuries within the period of historical time are not sufficient to explain the gradual development of the distinctions of the human race, but, on the other hand, he declares the oldest human remains from the earliest stone period as " lying back out of the range of chronology." From the very begiiming the spirit of man has been the principal factor of his being. It is his true Ego. Judged according to its original con- ception and its higher divine destiny, humanity is a thoroughly good and noble principle; but by the invasion of sin into the development of the race its innate nobility has degenerated. Without redeem- ing help from above, without the intervention of the incarnate Son of God, a return to the normal and original condition would be impossible. While himmnity is still far removed from the full realisa- tion of its ideal in an ethical and religious respect, faith in the final victory of the good in humanity over the evil must not be given up, as little as the striving after the highest development of culture must cease. The recdm of Christ and the realm of true humanity form concentric circles; the ideal of humanity is very little distinguished from the Christian ideal of life. The true aim of humanity 146 Kanohester IB rightly understood only by those of its apostles who see in the pioneers of foreign and home missions of Christianity their self-evident allies, and in the holy spirit of Christ the perfec- tion toward which all spiritual life of humanity must tend. (0. ZOcKLERf.) Bxbuoorapht: On the Biblical doctrine of man consult the works in and under the article Biblical THEOLoaT, es- pecially the treatises by H. Schults, and W. Beyschlag. For the treatment in systematic theoloxy consult the sec- tion on Anthropology in the works cited \mder Dogma, D0GMATXC8. Further works in the same line are: M. Hopkins. Outline Study of Man, New York. 1876; idem. Scriptural Idea of Man, ib. 1883; J. Laidlaw. Bible Doc- trine of Man, Edinburgh, 1879; and Bishop Butler's fa- mous Sermona, new ed., Ekiinburgh, 1888. From the scientific standpoint the reader is referred to the article Evolution and the literature under it, par- ticularly the works of Darwin, Huxley, Fiske, Mivart, Wallace, Romanes, Jje Conte, Weismjinn, Croll, McCosh, Dodson, Calderwood, Haeckel. Consult further: the Duke of Argyll, Primeval Man, London. 1860; L. Figuier, FrinUHve Man, ib. 1870; C. Lyell. Antiquity of Man, ib. 1873; H. Spencer. Deeeriptive Sociology, 8 vols., ib. 1873- 1882; J. F. McLennan, Studies in Ancient History, ib. 1886; A. Quatrefages, The Human Species, ib. 1886; J. Lubbock, The Origin of Civilization and Primitive Con- dition of Man, ib. 1881; C. F. Keary, The Dawn of His- tory, ib. 1888; H. Lotse. Microcosmus, books iv. sqq., Edinburgh, 1888; E. Clodd. Childhood of the World, Lon- don, 1889; Q. F. Wright, lee-Age of America and its Bear- ings on the Antiquity of Man, New York, 1889; O. Ziems- sen, Makrokosmus; Grundideen tur Schopfungsgeschichte und MU einer harmonischen Weltanschauung, Got ha, 1893; A. H. Keane, Ethnology. Cambridge, 1896; B. Plats, Der Mensch, Leipsic, 1898; C. Gutberiet, Der Mensch, Ur- sprung und Enttoidclung, Paderbom. 1903; E. B. Tylor. primitive Culture, new ed., London. 1903; A. H. Wallace. Man's Place in Nature, New York, 1903; L. H. Morgan. Ancient Society, reprint. New York, 1907.
MANASSEH BEN ISRAEL MANASSEH BEN ISRAEL

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANASSEH BEN ISRAEL: Jewish theologian and patriot; b. at La Rochelle (78 m. s. of Nantes), France, in 1604; d. at Middelburg (47 m. s.w. of Rotterdam), Holland, Nov. 20, 1657. He received his education at Amsterdam, where he became a noted pulpit orator. He is best known for his service to his people by securing for them through personal intercession with Cromwell per- mission to settle under protection in England, erect a synagogue in London, and purchase ground there for a cemetery. His principal work was El Conciliador (part 1, Frankfort, 1632, parts 2-4, Amsterdam, 1641-51), an attempt to reconcile all passages in the Old Testament which seem to conflict. BIBLIOGRAPHY: JE, viii. 282-284; DNB, xxxvi. 13-14.
IV., 4. MANCHESTER, CHARLES MANCHESTER, CHARLES

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANCHESTER, CHARLES: Church of God; b. at Burritt, 111., Dec. 28, 1858. He was educated at Park College, Mo. (A.B., 1883), and Oberlin Theo- logical Seminary (B.D., 1886). Having been or- dained a minister in his denomination as early as 1879, he held pastorates at Mt. Carroll, 111. (1886- 1888), Decatur, 111. (1888-89), and Milmine and Lodge, 111. (1889-90), whUe from 1890 to 1896 he was preacher in a church at Barkleyville, Pa., and also principal of the academy in the same place. He was then connected with Findlay College, Find- lay, O., from 1896 to 1904, being successively pro- fessor of Greek and philosophy (1896-1901), and professor of philosophy and theology (1901-04), in addition to being acting president of the same in- stitution from 1896 to 1900, and president from that year to 1904. Since 1904 he has been pastor of a church of his denomination at Wooster, O. He was secretary of the Board of Missions of the Gen- eral Eldership of the Church of God from 1893 to 1901, and was editor of the Missionary Signal, which he founded, from 1893 to 1896 and of the Findlay College News from 1897 to 1904. 146 HANDiBANS. Orisin and Names (S 1). Recent Reporta. The System Outlined (( 2). The Earliest Theogony and Cosmogony (S 3). Later Theogony and Cosmogony (( 4). Mandsan Cosmology ({ 5). Chronology and Eschatology (S 6). The many Gnostic sects against which the Church Fathers strove left little Uterature to survive till the present. The Mancheans, who still are found in scanty numbers in Persia and the region of southern Babylonia, are an exception; and their rich Uterature is very suggestive of the varied sources of Gnostic systems. This sect, belonging to ophitio Gnosticism, to form its system combined elements from Judaism, early Chris- z. Origin tianity, and Sassanian Parseeism with and an original Babylonian and early Names. Aramaic basis of religion. Connection is to be found also with the heretical sect of disciples of John the Baptist, and derivation is allowed by the Mandseans themselves from the Sabians of pre-Mohammedan Arabia (Koran, ii. 69, v. 73, xxu. 17). Indeed, " Sabian " is an Arabized word meaning '' baptist." In their prin- cipal sacred work, the Ginza or the Sidra Rabba (" Great Book ")» the Mand^eans call themselves N<i9orayya, the " Nazarenes." In the same source the name Mandayya is also employed, from the word madda*, " knowledge,'' with which is com- bined hayya, ** life," in the sense of gnosis or knowl- edge of life (see Gnosticism). Theodore bar Choni gives them other names, as MashkenayyCf from MasKkeruit the Mandaean word for church; Dosti, from Persian dost^ ** friend "; and Adonseans, from their assumed founder, Ado, who was perhaps a reformer or leader of a party. Theodore makes Ado come from Adiabene to the district of Maishan (Mesene) on the lower Euphrates and Tigris, where he lived as a mendicant (perhaps like the Brah- manic bhikshu or fakir), surrounded by disciples. Ado is then said to have heard of a man named Papa on the upper course of the river Ulai (the modem Karun), of whom he sought shelter. There he settled by the wayside to beg from travelers. Theodore gives also the names of Ado's father, mother, and brothers, which names all have signifi- cance in the Mandsan religion. On account of the honor which they pay to John the Baptist, the Man- dffians bear also the name Christians of St. John, though there is little in their life and nothing in their dogma which merits the name Christian, their doctrine of redemption going back to the god Mar- duk (see Babylonia, VII., 2, § 10). The first knowledge of this sect in modem times wajs brought to Europe by the Carmelite missionary Ignatius a Jesu, who in the middle of the seven- teenth century lived many years in 2. Recent Basra and converted some of the Reports, adherents to Christianity (see bibliog- The raphy below for his book). He re- System garded them as descendants of disci- Outlined, pies of John the Baptist, who had fled thither from persecution, being led to this view by the honors paid by them to the Bap- tist, their many legends of him, and their practise System of Ceremonial (S 7). The Clergy ({ 8). Last Rites; the Soul's Hap (S 9). Present Conditions; the Language (10). Sources of Mandman Doctrines ({ 11). Babylonian and Manichean Ideas Borrowed (f 12). of baptizing only in rivers. He gave their number as from 20,000 to 25,000 families, scattered through Babylonia, Persia, Goa, Ceylon, and India, in the latter coimtry reckoning to them the Thomas-Chris- tians (Nestorians). Further information came through Abraham Ecchellensis (q.v.), the mission- ary Angelus a Sancto Josepho, Pietro deUa Valle, Jean Th^venot, Carsten Niebuhr, and others. The reports of these writers have considerable value, dealing as they do with a time when the sect was relatively large. The sources of first importance for knowledge of the Mandseans are their own wri- tings, especially the Ginza, which are, however, only fragments of a once large religious literature. The older parts of the Ginza date back to the early Mohainmedan period, 700-900 a.d. Besides the great collections of the sect, there are many tracts for priests and for laity, dealing with sickness and demoniacal possession, often employed as amulets and worn on the breast. The present Mandsean religion has, under Mohammedan influence, taken on a monotheistic form. But study of the Ginza shows that this is the result of development; the early form was polytheistic (cf. W. Brandt, Die mand&ische Religion^ Leipsic, 1889) and dealt with theogony and cosmogony; this was succeeded by a combination of Jewish-Christian sources under Indian influence. The next stage appears to have been under the ascendancy of Persian thought, es- pecially in its eschatology, followed by a period of confusion, which in turn gave way to a monotheis- tic type of theology with a " Great King of Light " as the chief deity, from which the step to Allaha as God was eajsy. The earliest priestly form of the religion dealt, as did the systems of Phenicia and Babylonia, with the origins of gods and of the world. There stand out in this two forms, now distinct, now united, the " Great Fruit " (cf. Hebr. periy), Pira Rabba, and Mana Rabba, " Great Spirit." Pira Rabba is the All, the comprehensive basis of things, bounded only by itself, from which all things came. It is the '' golden egg '* 3. The of the Brahmanic cosmogony which, Earliest at first a unit in which rests Brahma Theogony or Purusha, divides into heaven and and earth. It is regarded as an independ- Cosmogony. ent and spontaneous deity and as crea- tor. This is a conception not peculiar to India and the Mands^ans. With Pira Rabba is closely connected Ayar Ziwa Rabba, " Great Lus- trous Ether " (cf. Syr. o'ar, Gk. aer), or Yora Rabba, ' Great Brilliance,'' from which last sprang the " Great Jordan " or stream of heaven. In Pira Ayar appears as a personal spirit Mana Rabba de et^ara, '* Great Spirit of Excellence," usually called in the system Mana Rabba (ut sup.). While the origin and meaning of this last term are not clear, derivations are given from the Indo-Persian man, 147 tt thought/' and Arabic ma*na, ** mind/' " mean- ing." It probably corresponds to the Indian at- marif " principle of life or individuality." With it, as female potency, Demutha, " image/' is joined, and a triad of Pira-Ayar, Mana Rabba, and Demu- tha is formed. Thus far no visible world or life existed, only the transcendental. Hence there ap- pears l^ayye Eadmaye, " First Life," formed from Mana Rabba; and in Blandiean prayers he is al- ways the first invoked. From him proceeded the countless emanations of gods, eons, and angels, whose task it was to create the visible world. (This theogony is not the only one present in the system, since other parts speak of a Nitufta, '' Material of Life," corresponding to Qayye Kadmaye; another name given is Nebat, " sprout," who creates 800 eons and other beings.) From Mana Rabba pro- ceed in fantastic completeness other Manas, called also Piras, more commonly Uthriyye (Uthras), " dominions " or " powers." From " First Life " emanated Sayye Tinyaniyye, " Second Life," called also Yoshamin (cf. Hebr. ahamayim, " heavens "), who evoked Uthras, erected dwell- ings, and called a ** Jordan " into existence. Three of these Uthras desired to enter upon the work of creation, to which Second Life agreed, but First Life was averse and called into existence Kebar Rabba or Manda de tiayye, ** Spirit of Life," which personifies knowledge of life. This last creation becomes the center of Mandsan theology and its preexistent Christ, with which Hibil Ziwa, the power acting as redeemer in the world of fact, was identified. Yet this redemption and this '' Christ " are not at all parallel to the conceptions carried by the same names in the Christian system. Manda de l^ayye is to be derived from Marduk, and his work may be equated with Marduk's in vanquish- ing the monster Tiamat. Many epithets applied to Marduk are applied also to Manda de t^ayye, such as ** beloved son," ** good shepherd," " word of Ufe "; and, like Marduk, Manda de ^ayye be- came potent in creation, acting in opposition to the presumptuous Uthras and Second Life. Before this, however, he had to make a " descent into hell," during which he came into conflict with the powers of darkness, including one Rufia (Heb. ruahf the " Spirit of God " of Gen. i. 2, converted by the Mandseans in their anti-Christian bias into a chief devil), conquered them and appointed as their pimishment that their food should be fire and their drink foul water. He created Gabriel, who was to be the demiurge (known also as Petahil, who appears elsewhere as an emanation of '' Second Life "). The seven planets and the twelve signs of the zodiac are created, land, water, and the fir- mament follow in order, then the first man, in whose creation Hibil, Sitil, and Anos (cf. the Biblical Abel, Seth, and Enos), " brothers " of Manda de l^ayye, cooperate, after which they marry Adam to Eve. The " seven " (planets) attempt to lead the pair into sin, but are pre- vented by the creators of man; vain attempts are also made to destroy man. Yet the evil spirits maintain their hold on the world, the " twelve " (zodiacal signs) divide the world-age among themselves, and the " seven " found false religions and call into existence beasts of prey and other evil beings. When the religion began to develop toward monotheism (ut sup., § 2, end), the divine figures took another form. Pira, Ayar, Yora, and Mana disappear, and instead of them the 4. Later '' great king of light " reigns alone. Theogony The portrayal of the world of light, and in which this being sits enthroned, Cosmogony, agrees with the Manichean picture of the " kings of the paradise of light." The address to him at the beginning of the Ginza is noteworthy: ** Praised, blessed, glorified, cele- brated and highly honored be thou, O god of truth, whose might is great, who hast no bounds, who art pure glory and sheer light which nothing dims; a gracious, approachable and spiritual existence [art thou], a kind deliverer of all who are faithful, supporting and upholding all good in strength and wisdom." The bridge to the creation of the visible world Lb found, according to this phase of Man- dffian thought, in the unfolding of the light-god in his shining ether. From this early epitome of light go forth the numerous eons (*Uthre, ** splendors "), Second Life, sometimes called Yoshamin (" Yah- weh of the heavens "), then Manda de t^ayye, the life-spirit, mediator and savior of Mandsean theol- ogy, the first man. Second Life seeks to gain su- premacy over First Life, fails, and is exiled from the world of pure ether into that of dimmer light. Then there issue a series of emanations, the first of whom are Hibil, Sitil and Anos (ut sup.). The last is John the Baptist. These appear both as brothers and as sons of Manda de t^ayye, and also in other relationships. Of these Hibel, or Hibil Ziwa, is the most celebrated. He receives the same titles as Manda, has the same activity, and indeed is merged as though he were the same being. From Second Life also emanate sons, the last one named variously Third Life and Abathur, the " Ancient One," also called Father of Uthra. He sits at the outermost bound of the world of light, where is the great gate which leads to the middle and lower regions; there he weighs the deeds of the departed who come to him, returning to the lower regions those spirits whose deeds prove too light, while to the others Abathur opens the way to the higher regions of light. In the beginning there was under Abathur an immense void, and at the bot- tom the troubled black water. As he looked into this and saw his image reflected, Petahil (the mate- rial nature of the deep of Chaos) came into exist- ence as his son to become the demiurge of the Mandaeans, equivalent to the Yaldabaoth (" Chaos- son ") of the Ophites. He was commanded by his father to create the earth and man. Some passages make him do this alone, others assign to him de- mons as his helpers, especially the seven spirits of the planets. From this point confusion exists as to the sequence of events. Here begin " the en- tanglements of Mands^an theology " (A. J. H. W. Brandt, ut. sup., pp. 48-55). The course of action follows in part the usual Semitic cosmogony — Petahil erects the heaven, reduces the diffused, floating matter into form as the earth and fixes it in position, and creates the bodies of Adam an4 MandSBans 148 EvB; but can not give them life, which was accom- plished by Hibil, Sitil, and Anos, who obtained life from Mana Rabba. Petahil, because of his failure, was by his father Abathur excluded from the world of light until the judgment day, when he will be raised by Hibil, be baptized and made king of the Uthras, and receive worship. The imderworld, described in the Ginza, consists of four entrances and three hells. Each of the en- trances is governed by a king and queen. The kingdom of darkness is divided into 5. Man- thr^ stories, each ruled by an old d»an king. These kings, named from above Cosmology, downward, are S'dum, the " Warrior," Giv, the " Great," and Krun or Kar- kum, the oldest and mightiest, most often called the " Great Mountain of Flesh." The entrances to hell contain filthy, slimy water; in hell there is no water, and in the lowest hell (Krun's) there are only ashes, dust, and vacancy. In these regions fire continually bums, but, though it consumes, it gives no light. From these kings Hibil Ziwa took away all power by descending, clothed with the might of the god of light, Mana Rabba, into the lowest hell and wresting from Krun the knowledge of the secret name of darkness (see Name). Above the entrances to hell is the dwelling-place of Ru^a, a mighty she-devil, mother of Kin, queen of the fourth entrance. She was brought out from the underworld by Hibil and prevented from returning thither. The conception of Ru^a finely illustrates Mandffian hostility to Christianity, since she is the Syriac ruha dekudahaf " the Holy Ghost " (cf. Gen. i. 2). She corresponds to the Manichean Qawwa (Eve). She is the mother of Ur, Fire, the most fearful of all devils, corresponding to the original devil of the Manicheans. Ur attempted to take by storm the world of light, but was by Hibil cast back into the " black waters," chained there, and surrounded by seven iron and seven golden walls. While Petahil was engaged in the work of creation, Ru^a bore to her son Ur first seven sons, then twelve, and finally five more, all of whom Petahil set in the heavens, the seven as the planets, the twelve as the zodiacal signs, whUe what the five were is as yet undetermined. The planets are the sun, Venus, Mercury, the moon, Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars, and the names given to the last five are the old Babylonian names. These planets were set in the seven heavens; the sun is the ruler and is in the middle (fourth) heaven. They were intended by the creator to be helpers of man, but instead they sought to do him harm. They are the sources of evil. They have their stations to which they return after completing their heavenly journeys, and these stations are fixed on anvils which rest upon the belly of the conquered Ur. Heaven is by the Mandseans regarded as created out of the pur- est, clearest water, but so solidified that even the diamond will not cut it. On this water the planets and other stars sail; these arc all, like evil demons, dark by nature, but are illuminated by radiant crosses carried by angels. The clearness of the firmament enables man to look through all seven heavens to the polar star, the central sun about which the other bodies revolve, and to which Man- dseans turn their face at prayer. The earth they regard as a circle, inclining somewhat to the south, and surrounded on three sides by the sea. On the north is a great moimtain of turquoise, the refleo- tion of which causes the sky to appear blue. Be- hind this mountain is the world of the blessed, a kind of lower paradise, where the Egyptians reside who did not perish with Pharaoh in the Red Sea. They are regarded as the ancestors of the Man- dseans, since Pharaoh had been high priest and king of the Mandseans. Both worlds are surrounded by the Yamma rabba d'suf, the outer sea. The period of duration of the earth is fixed at 480,000 years, divided into seven epochs, each of which IB governed by a planet. According to the Ginza, the hmnan race has been three 6. Chro- times destroyed by water, fire, sword, nology and pestilence, only one couple r&- and Escha- maining alive after each time. At the tology. time of Noah, the world was 466,000 years old. After him rose many false prophets. The first prophet was Abraham, who came 6,000 years after Noah, when the sim ruled the world. Then came Moses, in whose time the Egyptians had the true religion. After him came Solomon, to whom the demons yielded obedience. The third false prophet is Yishu Mesilt^a (i.e., Jesus the Messiah) , the planet Mercury, a sorcerer. Forty- two years before him Uved, under King Pontius Pilate, the only true prophet, Yahya, or Yuhana bar Zikary& (i.e., John, son of Zacharias; Luke i. 13), whose mother was Enishbai (Elizabeth); Yahya, being deceived by the Messiah, baptized him. He is an incarnation of Hibil, who had preached repentance in the time of Noah. As a contemporary of the Messiah and John the Baptist lived Anos Uthra, a younger brother of Hibil, who had descended from heaven, was baptized by John, wrought miracles, healed the sick, raised the dead, was the cause of the crucifixion of the false Messiah, proclaimed the true religion, and, before his return to the world of lights, sent 360 prophets into the world to proclaim his teaching. Jerusalem, which was once built at the command of Aduna^ (Adonai), was destroyed by Anos, while the Jews were dis- persed into all the world, having killed John the Baptist. Two hundred and forty years after the appearance of the Messiah, 60,000 Manda^ans came out of the world of Pharaoh. Their high priest set- tled in Damascus, and their sacred writings are concealed there in the cupola of the mosque of the Omayyade. The last of the false prophets was Mohammed, called " the Perverter." After 4,000 or 5,000 years, mankind will again be destroyed by a terrific storm; but the earth will be again re- peopled by a man and a woman from the upper world, whose descendants will dwell on earth for 50,000 years in piety and virtue. Then ^ill Ur destroy the earth and the other middle worlds, after which, bursting asunder, he will fall into the abyss of darkness, to be annihilated there with all worlds and powers of darkness. Then the universe will become a realm of light, enduring forever. The weekly holy day of the Mandseans is Sunday, which is celebrated by abstention from work and by divine service, with reading of the scriptures by 149 the priest. Modem travelers record the use of Thuraday also as holy and as sacred to Hibil Ziwa. The Ginza does not enjoin other sacred 7. System seasons, but it seems clear that cer- of Cere- tain festivals have been long in use. *wft"i^l New Year's Day is mentioned in the Ginza as a time to abstain from ablu- tions In running water, probably on the groimd that on that day the angel who protects the waters is engaged in celebrating a festival and consequently the evil powers find their opportunity for assailing men; Mandseans are therefore on that day not to leave the house and especially not to approach water. Yet scholars testify to the celebration of a New Year's festival, called Nauruz rabba, be- ginning on the first day of the first ^\inter month and continuing six days, or seven, if with them be reckoned the last day of the old year. On the first day of the year the priests and scholars forecast the prospects of that year. From the eighteenth to the twenty-second of the fourth month is celebrated the feast of the ascension of Hibil Ziwa from the regions of darkness to his own realm of light. The five days intercalated between the eighth and ninth months of the year are a great festival of baptism during which all Mandseans must bathe three times daily, before meals, and dress wholly in white. The first day of the eleventh month is a feast in honor of the 360 Uthras. The first day of the fifth month is employed to commemorate the Egyptians who perished in the Red Sea. The lost day of the old year is preparatory to the New Year's festival. The Mandsan year is solar, divided into twelve months of thirty days each, with five days intercalated be- tween the eighth and ninth months. The year is further divided into seasons of three months each, beginning with winter. The week has seven days, named after the planets. In the matter of the time for prayer there is some contradiction; one passage seems to require it three times a day and twice in the night, another seems to forbid it dur- ing the darkness. Prohibition of fasting appears as a mark of opposition to Christianity, though a pretense of fasting is said now to be made because of fear of the Mohammedans. Yet spiritual fasts are enjoined in keeping the members and organs of the body from sinning; moreover, there are times when the priests abstain from flesh. Mandseans may not eat of the blood of animals, of anything that is pregnant, or of that which still has life or which a beast of prey has pulled down. What has been killed with iron, cleansed, and purified is edi- ble, provided it has not been prepared by others than the faithful. There is no distinction made be- tween what in the natural world is clean and un- clean, since " all things which Petahil has made were made for Adam." Of Mandsean sacraments the chief is baptism, with which is bound up com- munion. Unbaptized children are not reckoned as belonging to the Mandsean community. Baptism must be performed in running water and not in pools or tanks, and is by complete and trine immer- sion. The baptism of adults is required in a great number of cases; when demanded by an act of consecration or of sin, on Sunday and festivals, on return from a foreign landi after contact with a corpse, after being bitten by a snake or a wild ani- mal, or when a ceremony has been omitted. In the Eucharist are used two elements, corresponding to the Host and wine of Catholic ceremonial. Its pur- pose is to consecrate the participant by imparting special strength. Prerequisites are baptism, good repute, and adherence to the Mandsean faith. It is received at the festivals. The bread is prepared from fine white flour by priests, without salt or leaven, divided into small portions, and baked in a new oven. It is kept in the priest's house, and la received directly into the mouth from the priest's fingers. Another usage connected with baptism and with Sunday observance is the giving of the hand, called by the Mandseans kiuta (" fidelity "), which may be understood from a corresponding Manichean custom to signify mutual support. As a provision against sudden death, unprovided with the common consecration, there is a sort of mass for the soul by the bishop, by which the beneficiary is obligated to an ascetic life. The church building proper of the Mandseans is for the priests and their helpers only; the laity remain at the entrance. It is small, holding only a very few persons, has only two windows, and the door is always at the south, so that the entrant may look at the North Star. It contains no altar and no ornament, but has a few shelves in the comers for vessels. It is al- ways near running water. At the consecration of a church a dove is sacrificed — a trace of the old Ishtar worship. The injunction to marry and peo- ple the earth is stringent, and condenmation of Christian asceticism severe. The Mandiean ministry has three grades. The first is that of Shkanda, deacon. The candidate must be without physical blemish, and is generally taken from the family of a priest or a bishop. He undergoes a preliminary training of twelve years under priests, accompanying them on their jour- neys, and at the age of nineteen is ordained and begins to assist the priest or bishop in 8. The the services. After a year in this Clergy, grade, he is admitted to the second grade, that of Tarmtda, priest or pres- byter, being ordained by a bishop and two priests or by four priests empowered by the bishop, but only on condition that the candidate is approved by the community. The period of probation in- volves a trial lasting over at least sixty-two days, and may through inadvertence or accident in the conduct of the trial be prolonged for several months. A part of the ceremony is bathing three times daily in a river in full clothing, the wet robes being changed only after the candidate has completed a ritual of prayer. The ordination is terminated by baptism, in which the candidate's wife and mother participate, if they are still living, and a feast in which presents are given to the poor. The highest grade is Ganzivra, " treasurer," or bishop. The candidate, who is chosen from among the presby- ters, must show his ability to explain difficult pas- sages in the Mandsean scriptures. Still another grade is reported by Petermann, that of Risk amma, " head of the people," a rank corresponding to that of patriarch or pope. This grade, according to the Mandsans, has been filled only twice, once before HandsBans Kande 150 John the Baptist by Pharaoh, and onoe since, by a certain Adam abu al-farash, both of whom were not of this world but came from the upper world. Women are admitted to the clergy. They enter the diaconate as virgins and become presbyters only after marriage with one of the higher orders. The official dress of the clergy is white throughout, consisting of breeches, tunic, girdle, stole, and tur- ban, and on the little finger of the right hand the priest wears a gilt and the bishop a golden ring, on which is inscribed shum Yawar ziioar, '' name of Yawar Ziwa," i.e., of Hibil Ziwa. In exercising their ministerial functions the clergy go barefooted. Man consists of three parts, the body, the ani- mal soul, and the heavenly soul. On the approach of death a Mandsean is attended by a deacon and two or more nurses, is bathed with warm and then with cold water, and then clothed in the funeral robes consisting of seven pieces. The body is laid out with the head to the south so that 9. Last the eyes are directed to the polar star, Rites; the and the grave is dug so that the body Soul's Hap. maintains the same position, and prayers are offered at the interment. The soul of the dead passes out of the earth-region into the sphere of light, and according to some pas- sages of the scriptures is accompanied by an Uthra, who comes for that purpose from the kingdom of light, finally passing a stream which constitutes the last hindrance to its approach to the ** house of Ufe." At the door of this house sits Abathur with his scales to weigh the deeds of the departed; after passing this ordeal, the soul is received and clothed in garments of light. Those whose deeds do not permit their reception are remitted to the lower regions, there to receive punishment of stripes without end. The end of the world is called ** the day of the end " and " the second death," and is brought about by the serpent Leviathan which destroys all not belonging to the world of light and the earth itself. Mand£eans are not willing to dis- close their beliefs to strangers for fear of arousing the fanaticism of the Mohammedans. Part of the knowledge gained came through the son of a priest who became a convert to Roman Catholicism and communicated information to M. N. Siouffi, the French consul in Mosul 1874-75. While in the seventeenth century the munbers of the Mandsans were given at about 20,000 fam- ilies, at present there is only a small remnant of about 1,500 persons, living south of Bagdad along the Tigris and Euphrates and in Khuzistan, ply- ing the trades of goldsmiths, black- zo. Present smiths, builders, and carpenters. They Conditions; are not to be confused with the Mo- the hammedan sect of Nosairiyah in Language. Lebanon. Externally the Mandseans do not distinguish themselves from Mohammedans. Since the latter arrogate to them- selves white clothing, which the Ginza regards as holy, Mand£eans usually wear brown raiment or brown with white stripes. MandsBans speak Arabic or Persian, but the language of their scriptures is an Aramaic dialect of great value for the student of language and is related lexically and granmiatically to that of the Babylonian Talmud and to the Na- bataean tongue. It was probably the native tongue of Mani, and the Ginza doubtless contains long passages from the Manichean writings (see Mani, Manicheans, S 13). Nevertheless, the pronuncia- tion as at present employed by Mandseans has not been correctly transmitted. The vocabulary is Ara- maic in groundwork, with loan words from Jewish, Sjrrian-Christian, and especially Persian sources, while the later writings are mixed with Arabic. The alphabet, which probably arose in Babylonia and combines the early Aramaic and Palmyrene ele- ments, has twenty-two letters. The origins of Mandsean doctrine, it must firmly be maintained, are to be sought in the religion of Babylonia; and Babylonia itself was the place where it arose. A Jewish or Christian source in Palestine is out of the question. Mandseans are not the descendants of the disciples of John the Baptist, although he and the Jordan are so fre- quently mentioned in their writings. zz. Sources The tradition of the people themselves of Man- that they arose in Galilee, were perse- dsean cuted in Jerusalem and driven thence Doctrines, by the caliphs is historically worth- less. They are to be compared with such sects as the Hemerobaptists of the Church Fathers (Eusebius, Hist, ecd., IV., xxii. 6; NPNF, 2 ser., i. 199; Epiphanius, Hcer. xvii.; " Clementine Recognitions,*' i. 54: " Some even of the disciples of John, who seem to be great ones, have separated themselves from the people and proclaimed their own master as the Christ "; ANF, vui. 92). The reputed founder and other Biblical characters and coloring have come into the religion through the syncretistic process. To connect them with these early sects is no more right than to associate them with the Nazaraioi of Epiphanius (Hcer. xviii.). The mistake arose in the misapprehension of mis- sionaries of the seventeenth century, who mistook them for a kind of Christians on accoimt of their practise of baptism and related them with the Bap- tist and with Galilee. It is true that during the second and third centuries the religion passed through a period of sympathetic feeling for Chris- tianity and was influenced by its ritual. Thus Biblical reminiscences and nomenclature, from Adam to John and Jesus, including even the tei^ minology of parts of the Jewish ritual, went to the building of the Mandsean scriptures and teaching. But the antichristian bias appears in making Moses a false prophet, Jesus the evil planet Mercury, and the Holy Ghost the most devilish evil spirit, as well as in the polemics against Christian monasticism and other Christian institutions. Still more ob- servable is the antijudaic bias, especially in the utter abhorrence of circumcision. While the con- stant use of the name " Jordan " might seem to imply derivation of the sect from people \^ho onoe dwelt on that river, the usage is to be compared with that in Hippolytus (Hcer. v. 2; ANF, v. 52), where the ** great Jordan " is employed in the Naassene system to express the idea of the great sanctifying element of life in the world of light. Thus the name of the Biblical Jordan was employed in the earliest Gnostic systems, and notably in that of the Perata) (who were in the Euphrates regioa)| 161 Mandaans Kande who also employed " Egyptians '* and " Red Sea " in just such a metaphorical sense as did the Man- dsans. Indeed, the question of the sources of Mandseism is just that of the sources of Ophitism and Gnosticism in general. These systems are not traceable to the teachings of the Persian Zarathus- tra, nor to Phenician heathenism, nor to the Greek mysteries, but simply to the Babylonian-Chaldean national religion, which was domiciled in the region where Ophites, Peratse, and Mandseans Uved, and where they were distinguished from Christians (cf. W. Anz, ZuT Frage nach der Ursprung des GnosH- gi8mu8f pp. 59 sqq., Leipsic, 1897). While some fundamental conceptions are changed, as when the names of Babylonian deities become the names of the planets and arc regarded as evil spirits, yet the derivation is so clear upon investigation that no doubt can be entertained upon this point. The Mandsan baptism can not be derived from the Jewish baptism of proselytes, nor is it Christian baptism taken over and exaggerated; the Man- dsean practise is diametrically opposed to both. Christian baptism implies metanoiaf 12. Baby- ethical rebirth, and it marks the in- lonian and auguration of an ethical renewing of Manichean the heart after the pattern of the Ssr Ideas vior; the Mandaean rite, so frequently Borrowed, repeated, b a theurgic-magical opersr tion and aims at an ever-increasing insight into the secrete of the kingdom of light through the mediation of water, the element of the king of light. The MandsDan light-god Mana Rabba is to be identified with the Babylonian Ea (see Babylonia, VII., 2, § 3), and his emanation Manda de ^ayye or his son Hibil Ziwa with B^'s son Mar- duk (see Babylonia, VII., 2, § 10). Ea, the god of profound knowledge, father of the mediator Marduk, enthroned in the world-sea, whose holy clement is water, is the Ea of the brilliant ocean of heaven, as comes out in the Ayar-yora and the heavenly Jordan of the Mandapans. Similarly, as Marduk, the conqueror of Tiamat, appears in vari- ous incarnations like that of Gilgamesh, so do Hibil Ziwa and his successors. The parallels of Ishtar's descent into hell and that of Hibil Ziwa, the divi- sion of the planetary worlds into a system of seven, and the seat of Ea in the North with the MandsDan direction of worship to that quarter are sufficiently obvious. Similar relationship can be established with Manicheanism. Mani was in his youth an ad- herent of the Babylonian Mu'tasUah (" baptizers ")» an early Babylonian sect. Palestinian Hemero- baptists, Elkesaites (q.v.), Nazarenes, and Ebion- ites (q.v.) were sects which propagated in the West under Jewish influence Babylonian ideas, especially those of a mediator and the closely connected rite of baptism; these sects took form in pre-Christian times and later were hostile to Christianity. John the Baptist gave to the rite of baptism, thus de- rived, a new ethical content by connecting with it the Old-Testament expectation of a Messiah. Sim- ilarly the second sacrament of the Mandieans, the Eucharist, must be explained upon usage grounded in nature-religions, in honor paid to the pure ele- ments of nature and its gifts, and not as a perver- sion of the Christian mystery. The original teach- ing of Mani could not have been very different in this matter from the common Mands^n-Gnostio doctrine (see Mani, Manicheans). The conception of eons and of the ruh al-hayat, " spirit of life,'' are alike in the two systems (cf. the Valentinian Z6S). Similarly the work of the original man in combating the original devil is practically the same in Man- dffiism and Manicheanism, though the former has made the development more complex by introdu- cing a stratum of Aramaic thought in the names of angels and devils. While, then, the religious sys- tem of the Mandseans has especial interest rather in connection with the universal history of religion than with the theology of Christianity, yet there is much in it which can shed light upon the history of doctrine. In particular, the form of the Mandsean sacraments affords ground for thought to the in- vestigator of the history of the Christian sacra- ment of baptism. (K. Kessler.) Bibuoorapht: The Oima, called also the Sidra rabba, is beat consulted in the ed. of H. Petermann, Thetaurut tire liber magnue, viUgo '* Liber Adami," vol. i.. Berlin, 1867, vol. ii., Leipsic, 1867 (based on a comparison of four MSS. of 16th and 17th centuries). A prior ed. was by M. Nor- berg. Codex Naaarcsue, liber Adami appellatue, vols, i.-iv., Copenha^n, vol. v (onomasticon), Lund, 1817 (mislead- ing, being a Syriac transcription, but has Latin transl.). A (jerm. transl.. with notes, has been issued by W. Brandt, Gdttingen, 1893, and the same scholar gives the titles of the tracts or books of which the Gima is composed in his very scholarly AfandOiache Religion, pp. 207-209, Leipsic, 1889. Other Mand^ean writings published are: QoUuta, by J. Euting, Stuttgart, 1867 (a liturgical work); parts of the Sidra de Yahya (" Book of John "). in Germ. trannl. by G. W. Lorsbach, in Beitr&gen zur Philoeophie und Geechiehte, v (1799), 1-44. Manda>an inscriptions have been published: U. Pognon, Inacriptions mandaiUm dee coupea de Khouabir, 2 vols., Paris, 1898-99 (cf. the re- view by M. Lidsbarski in TLZ, 1899); idem, Une incan" tation corUre lee geniee malfaieanU en Mandaite, Paris, 1892; M. Lidcbarski, in Ephemerie fUr eemitietjie Epi- graphik, i. 1 (1900). 89-106; cf. J. H. Mordtmann and D. H. MQller, Sabaieche DenkmAler, Vienna, 1883. For early reports concerning the Manda^ans consult: F. Ignatius a Jesu, Narratio originie, rituum et errorum Chriatianorum S. Joannia, Rome, 1652; Abraham Ecchel- lensis, Euiychixia patriarcha Alexandrinua vindicatua, pp. 310-336, Rome. 1660; Jean Thdvenot, Voyage au Levant, Paris, 1664; J. Chardin, Journal du voyage ... en Perae, London. 1686; C. Niebuhr, Reiaeheachreibung nach Arabian und andem . . . LAndem, 3 vols., Hamburg, 1774-1837, Eng. transl., 2 vols., Edinburgh. 1792. The two impor- tant modem works, besides that of W. Brandt, ut sup., are by H. J. Petermann, Reiaen im Orient, 2 vols.. Leip- sic, 1861; and M. N. Siouffi, Studea aur la religion dea Soubbaa ou Sabtena, leura dogmea, leura mcpura, Paris, 1880. Not to be overlooked is W. Brandt, in JPT, xviii (1892). 405-438. 575-603. Consult further: J. Matter, Hiat. du gnoaticiama, ii. 394-422, Paris, 1828; L. E. Burckhardt, Lea Naxoriena ou Mandai-Jahja {discipiea de Jean), Stras- buig, 1840 (based on Norberg); D. Chwolsohn, Die Sao- bier, i. 1(X)-138. St. Petersburg, 1856; J. M. Chevalier Lycklama, Voyagea . . . dana la Miaopotamie, vol. iii.. book 3, diap. iv.. Paris, 1868; Babelon, in Annalea de phUoaophie chrHienne, 1881; E. Bischoff, Im Reiehe der Onoaia. Die myatiachen Lehren dea jiidiachen und chriat- lidien Onoaticiamua, Mand&iamua und AfanichQiamua und ihr babyloniachroatraler Uraprung, Leipsic, 1906; an im- portant body of magazine literature is indicated in Rich- ardson, Encyclopaedia, pp. 674-675; Encyclopcedia Bri- tannica, xv. 467. For the language: T. N6ldeke, MandA- iache Orammatik, Halle. 1875; idem, in Abhandlungen der OdUinger OeaeUaehaft, 1862; H. Pognon, InacripHona, ut. sup., pp. 257-308.
HANEGOLD OF LAUTENBACH MANEGOLD OF LAUTENBACH

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANEGOLD OF LAUTENBACH: German Au- gustinian monk; b. about 1060; d. after 1103, prob- ably on May 24. At an early age he entered the cloister of Gebweiler in Alsace, but when it was des- troyed by partizans of Henry IV., he went, after a period of wandering, to Bavaria about 1086, and found refuge in the cloister of Raitenbach. After 1090 he lived in the cloister of Marbach, near Col- mar in Alsace, ultimately becoming prior, and oi>- posing Henry to the very last. The great impor- tance attached to the pamphlet of the scholastic Wenrich of Treves (q.v.) moved Manegold to com- pose his Liber ad Gebehardum (MGH, Lib. de lite, i., 1890, 308-430), dedicated to Archbishop Gebhard of Salzburg, and written in the lifetime of Gregory VII., though not published until after his death. Manegold reveals himself as an enthusiastic par- tizan of the Gregorian party, and upholds the pope's views in all the disputes of the period, though from a radically democratic platform. Thus royalty, in his view, is not an ordinance of God, but an office bestowed by the people, and the relation between king and people is in the nature of a treaty, breach of which by the king enables the people to recede from the treaty and to dissolve the subject relation. In the light of these principles, Manegold Adndi- cated the pope's right to release the Germans from their oath of allegiance to Henry IV., though with- out being clear concerning the relation of such an exercise of popular sovereignty to the papal act of nullifying the oath. In his Opusculum contra Wolfelmum Coloniensem (ed. A. Muratori, Anec- dota, iv. 163-208, Padua, 1713; cf. Lib. de liU, i. 303-308), Manegold assails the assumption of « RELIGIOXra ENCYCLOPEDIA ££^1 compatibilicf of tbe teachings of the ancient phi- IcMopheni with Chriation dogma. Manegold of Laut«Dbach has often been con- fused with the philosopher Manegold {Hittoire lit- Uraire de la France, ix. 280-290, Paris, 1750), who probably likewise came from Alsace, and gained much renown as a teacher in France between 1070 and J 090. Carl Mikbt. BIBLIOGRAPHY W. VOD Gignbrecbl, in SilmnntbrridiU der Minduner Akadtmit, ISBB, ii. 297-330; N. Paultu. in £nnHr ouholivw d-AUact. tSSa. pp. 200-221, Z7B-Z80. 337-34S; W. MsiteoB. Omnn- Vf/., Leiinic. 1S94; C. Mirbt. Die PuUiiiid* in ZntaUrr tlrtenn VII.. piuuiim ib. 1894: G. Meyer von Knauu. JahrbQditr da drulidtm Bridi, un/<r Hnnrict. IV, und v.. vo!. Ui., ib. 1900; J. A. Endras, in Hitlonidi-patiliMdit Blatter, uxvii (ISOl), 3S9--101. 4SS-49B; 0. Koch, Uarunald Ton LatOmbadv. BbtUo. 1902; KL, viii. 6»7-5Ba
HANETHO MANETHO

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANETHO: Egyptian historian. He was prob- ably a native of Scbennytus, chief town of the nome of that name, flourished in the third century b.c, (luring the reign of Ptolemy Soter and possibly of Ptolemy Philadelphus, and was a priest of On (Heliopolis). He wrote in Greek for the temple archives an " Epitome of Things Physical," on Egyptian philosophy and theology, and what is cited by Josephus (Ant. I., iii. 9) aa " Egyptian His- tory." Only fragments of these works are ex- tant, in citations. Of the " Epitome- " the most extensive fragments arc in Plutarch's De I side et Osiri (chaps, viii., ix., xlix., Ixii., Ixxiii.). Of the " History " the most important fragment is a cata- logue of the kings of Egypt of dynasties I.-XXX. (Menea-Neclanebo II.), preserved in part in Julius Africanua and Eusebius. The fragments have been collected in C. and T. MiiUer, Fragmenia hietoricontm GTocortim, vol. ii (Paris, 1848), BIBLIOGRAPHY: F. J. Laulb. ifaJutho und da Turi-nrr KV,nipipopi/rut, Munich, ISSS; G. F, Votr^T.CkniiuilBilicda jUofxMa, B«hn. 1867; J. Knll, Compondaniinff SiAidiiofe dtM maneOiimitdun GaAichtmnrkf. Vienna, 1979.
I. 1900 MANN, CAMERON

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANN, CAMERON: Protestant Episcopal mis- sionary bishop of North Dakota; b. in New York City Apr. 3, 1851. He was educated at Hobart College {A.B., 1870) and the General Theological Seminary, from which he was graduated in 1873, and was ordered deacon in the latter year and ad- vanced to the priesthood in 1876. After being a missionary at Branchport and Dresden, N. Y., in 1873-74 and curate of St. Peter's, Albany, N. Y., in 1875, he was rector successively of St. James', Watkins, N. Y., from 1876 to 1881 and of Grace, Kansas City. Mo., from 1881 to 1901. In 1902 he was consecrated missionary bishop ot North Da- kota. In theology he is a liberal High-church- man, and has written Future Punishment (New York, 1888) and Comments at the Cross (1893).
MANNING, JAMES MANNING, JAMES

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANNING, JAMES: Baptist preacher and edu- cator; b. near Elizabethtown, N. J., Oct. 22, 1738; d. at Providence, R. I., July 29, 1791. He studied at Hopewell Academy in New Jersey, and at Prince- ton College (B.A., 1762). After about a year of evangelistic preaching in several colonies, he was urged by members of the Philadelphia Association to join them in an effort to establish a Baptist uni- versity. At about the same time the association voted its approval of an effort to enlist the entire Baptist body in an effort to found such an institu- tion in Rhode Island. Manning was sent to Rhode Island in 1763 to confer with leading brethren and to promote the enterprise (see Baptists, II., 2, § 3). In 1764 the legislature granted a charter in accordance with which the president and a major- ity of the trustees must always be Baptists, but all the leading denominations of the colony shall have representation on the board and members of all Evangelical denominations shall be eligible for professorships, etc. Pending the raising of funds and the fixing of the location of the college, Manning accepted the pastorate of the church at Warren, R. I., and conducted there an academy which should prepare the way for the future college. The Calvinistic Baptists of New England had been BO zealous for absolute independency that they had never united in associations. In 1767 Manning led in the formation of the Warren Association, which was to become a factor in the struggle for religious liberty and in the promotion of educational and missionary work. In 1770 he led in the ne- gotiations for the permanent location of the college, which resulted in the choice of Providence. He accepted the pastorate of the Providence church. then in a weak and discouraged condition, and soon brought it to great prosperity. The raising of funds and the erection of college buildings, the duties of administration, heavy teaching duties, and denom- inational leadership, together with the pastorate, gave him abundant occupation. He sought and secured the help of English Baptists in the equip- ment and endowment of the college. His college duties were suspended during the war, Rhode Island having been early captured by the British who turned the college buildings into barracks. In 1782 the college was reopened. In 1786 he was chosen by the Rhode Island General Assembly to represent the St^te in the national convention for the framing of the federal constitution. He used his great influence in favor of the adoption of the constitution by Rhode Island and other New Eng- land States, where there was much opposition. He was an eloquent and impressive preacher, master of an elegant and forceful literary style, while his attainments gave him a commanding position among his contemporaries. His theological views were moderately Calvinistic. A. H. Newman. BIBLIOGRAPHY: R. A. Guild, Life, Timee and Correepond^ ence of . . . James Manning, and the Early Hist, cf Brown University, Boston, 1864; W. B. Sprague. Annals of the American Pulpit, vi. 89-97. New York, 1860; F. Piper, Lives of the Leaders of our Church Universal, transl. and ed. H. M. MacCracken, pp. 608-614. Philadelphia, 1879; A. H. Newman, in American Church History Series, vol. U., ib. 1894.
MANNIZ, DANIEL MANNIX, DANIEL

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANNIX, DANIEL: Irish Roman CathoUc; b. at Charleville (33 m. n.n.w. of Cork), County Cork, Mar. 4, 1864. He was educated at the Chris- tian Brothers' School, at St. Colman's College, Fer- moy, and St. Patrick's College, Maynooth (1882- 1890). Since 1891 he has been connected with the latter institution, where he has been professor of mental and moral philosophy (1891-94), professor of theology (1894-1903), and president (since 1903). In 1906 he was appointed domestic prelate to the pope, and in 1907 was made a senator of the Royal University of Ireland.
MAHT, RICHARD MANT, RICHARD

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANT, RICHARD: Church of Ireland; b. at Southampton Feb. 12, 1776; d. at Ballymoney (12 m. n.n.w. ot Belfast), Ireland. Nov. 2, IS48. He was educated at Winchester and at Trinity Col- lege, Oxford (B.A., 1797; M.A., 1801). Ordained deacon in 1802 and priest in 1803, he was curate ot Buriton, Hampshire (1804-08); Crawley, Hamp- shire (1808-09); and Southampton (1809-10); vicar ot Great Coggeshall, Essex (1810-13); and rector ot St. Botolph, London (1815-20); and East Horsley, Surrey (1818-20). He was Bampton lec- turer in ISU and domestic chaplain to the arch- bishop of Canterbury from 1813 to 1815. In Apr., 1820, he was consecrated bishop ot Killaloe and Kilfenora and in Mar., 1823, he was translated to Down and Connor, to which Dromore was added in 1842. Mant was a very voluminous writer, both in prose and verse; ot his works the most important are; Scrmtms for Parochial and Domestic (/He(3vola., Oxford, 1813); his annotated Bible, in collabora- tion with George D'Oyly (3 vols., Oxford, 1814; eee Bibles, Annotated, II., J 9); Sermona Preached before the University of Oxford (1816); The Book t/ Psalms in a Metrical Version (1824); The Gospd Miracles, in a Series of Poetical Skdches (London, 1832); The British Months, a Poem i\S35): Ancient Hymns from the Roman Breviary (1837) ; and History/ of the Church of Ireland, from the Reformation (2 vols., 1840). Ot Mant's numerous hymns may be mentioned: " For all thy saints, O God " and " Come, Holy Ghost, my soul inspirel " BIBLIOGRAPHY: Memoirs were written by W. B. Uant. th* bishDp'n mm. l^onilon. 1857. snil by E, Berens. ib. 1849. Consult further: DNB. iixvi, OS-BS: S. W. DiilBeld, EriolUh Humnn. pp. 152. 18.1. 221, 342, 488, New YatV. 1886: Julian, llvmnolngi/. pp. 713-714.
MAHTOB, THOMAS MANTON, THOMAS

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MANTON, THOMAS: English nonconformist; baptized at Lydiard St. Lawrence (38 m. s.w. of Bristol), Somersetshire, Mar. 31, 1620; d. in Lor»- don Oct. 18, 1677. He was graduated from the University of Oxford (B.A., 1639; B.D., 1654; D.D., 1660), and was ordained deacon in 1640. He settled at Stoke Newington, London, in 1644 or 1645, and became rector of St. Paul's, Covent Gar- den, in 1656. He was one of the three scribes to the Westminster Assembly, and during the com- monwealth preached many times before parlia- ment. Despite his claw relations with the com- monwealth, he favored the restoration and was made in 1660 one of the twelve chaplains to the king, though he never performed the duties or re- ceived the emoluments of the office. In the same year he was offered the deanery of Rochester, but 165 Mansi Maori declined to subscribe. In 1662 he left St. Paul's and held meetings at first in his own house, and, as the attendance increased, elsewhere; these meet- ings were ignored till 1670, when Manton was arrested and kept in prison for six months. In 1672 he became one of the first six preachers for the merchants and citizens of London in Pinners' Hall. Manton was exceedingly attractive in the pulpit, pacific in spirit, and a man without enemies. He wrote commentaries on James (London, 1651 and often; latest issue, 1844), on Jude (1658), and on the Lord's Prayer (1684); many of his sermons were printed separately, while collections, with memoirs, etc., were made by W. Bates (5 vols., 1678-1701) and by R. Baxter (1 vol., 1679; re- printed, Achill, 1842), and individual sermons figure in sermon anthologies. BIBLIOGRAPHY: W. Harris, Some Memoir of the Life and Character of T. Manton, London, 1725; R. Baxter. Chria- tian Biography, pp. 199-226. ib. 1768; Walter Wilson, Hist. of Dissenting Churches, iil 646-666, ib. 1810; W. A. Shaw, HieL of the English Church . . . 1640-1660, vol ii. passim, ib. 1900; DNB, xxxvl 101-104.
MAOIT, MAONTTES MAON, MAONITES

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAON, MAONITES: A place and people men- tioned in the Old Testament. The place-name oc- curs in Josh. XV. 55 (see Jude a), and there is men- tion in Judges x. 12 of a people called Maonites. Modem critics, following the lead suggested by the best Septuagint readings, correct this to Midianites (cf. the commentaries on Judges of Moore, Budde and Nowack). Traces of a place or territory of the name " Maon " are found in the Meimim (Mehunim) of I Chron. iv. 41 (Hebr. and R. V.); II Chron. xx. 1 (R. V. margin), xxvi. 7. In these passages the Meunim appear in company with nomads, for the most part, and are located in mount Seir. The data used by the chronicler, therefore, implied the existence of a stock of Meunim who about 860-700 B.C. came from the south and assailed Judah. This agrees with the fact of a modem site named Ma'an, fifteen and a half miles southeast of Petra. In case this is correct, it might be that the Meunim of Ezra ii. 50 and Neh. vii. 52 were the descendants of some of these who had been made prisoners in the cam- paigns noted by the chronicler and had been assigned to service in the temple (cf. Ezek. xliv.7). The fact that the Meunim are represented as parties to an alliance with important peoples like the Moabites and Ammonites suggests that they are to be con- nected with the early Arabic stock of the Minssans, whose sway was overthrown by the Sabians (see Arabia). Winckler and Hommel connect the Minae- ans with the North Arabian Mu^ri (see Assyria, VI., 2, i 1). (H. GUTHE.) Bibliography: R Glaser, Skizze der Oeechichte und Geo- graphie Arabiena, u. 14-15, 21 sqq., 450-451. Berlin. 1890. and cf. another view by Sprenger. in ZDMO, xliv. 505 sqq.; F. Hommel, Ancient H^rew Traditiona ae lUue- trated by the Monuments, pp. 251. 272, London, 1807; idem, Aufa&Lte und Abhandlungen, iii. 273 sqq., Munich, 1892; F. Buhl. Oeechichte der Edomiter, pp. 40 sqq.. Leip- sic, 1893; Winckler, in Schrader, KAT, pp. 140 sqq.; DB, iii. 240; EB, iii. 2934-35. MAORI. See New Zealand.
THE NEW SCHAFF-HERZOQ MAPPA MAPPA

韩

暂时没有译文正文。

英

MAPPA: The linen cloth with which the minis- terial table, and afterward the altar, was cov- ered. See Altar, III., I, a, J 2.
来源: public_domain